Transistorized Inverter: Instruction Manual (Detailed)

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 191

T R A N S IS T O R IZ E D IN V E R T E R

F R - S 5 0 0
IN S T R U C T IO N M A N U A L (D e ta ile d )

W IR IN G C hapter 1

F U N C T IO N S C hapter 2

P R O T E C T IV E
F U N C T IO N S C hapter 3
H E A D O F F IC E :M IT S U B IS H I D E N K I B L D G M A R U N O U C H I T O K Y O 1 0 0 -8 3 1 0

S P E C IF IC A T IO N S C hapter 4
P r in te d in J a p a n

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Transistorized inverter.
This instruction manual (detailed) provides instructions for advanced use of the
FR-S500 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always
read this instruction manual and the instruction manual (basic) [IB-0600026] packed
with the product carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
This instruction manual uses the International System of Units (SI). The measuring
units in the yard and pound system are indicated in parentheses as reference values.
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have
read through the instruction manual (basic) and appended documents carefully and
can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full
knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions.
In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into
"WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
WARNING conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
CAUTION conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may
cause physical damage only.
Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to
conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important
to personnel safety.
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
You may get an electric shock.
Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access
the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get
an electric shock.
If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic
inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric
shock.
Before starting wiring or inspection, check for residual voltages with a meter etc.
more than 10 minutes after power-off.
Earth the inverter.
Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this equipment should be
fully competent to do the work.
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric
shock or be injured.
Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock.
Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
Do not change the cooling fan while power is on.
It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.
When you have removed the front cover, do not touch the connector above the
3-digit monitor LED display. You will get an electric shock.

A-1

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
Mount the inverter to incombustible material. Mounting it to or near combustible
material can cause a fire.
If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow
of large current could cause a fire.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P(+), N(−). This could
cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to
prevent damage etc.
Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise,
damage etc. may occur.
Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc.
While power is on and for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter or
brake resistor as they are hot and you may get burnt.
4. Additional instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing.
When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may fall off
or fail.
Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter.
Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
Prevent screws, wire fragments, other conductive bodies, oil or other flammable
substances from entering the inverter.
Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Ambient
-10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing)
temperature
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage
Environment

-20°C to +65°C * (-4°F to 149°F)


temperature
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
Ambience
oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m (3280.80feet) above sea level for
standard operation. After that derate by 3% for
Altitude, vibration every extra 500m (1640.40feet) up to 2500m
(8202.00feet) (91%).
5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C 0040)
*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
A-2

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) Wiring
CAUTION
Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, radio
noise filter or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter.
The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
the direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Trial run
CAUTION
Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a
sudden start-up.
When the load GD2 is small (at the motor GD2 or smaller) for 400V from 1.5K to
3.7K, the output current may vary when the output frequency is in the 20Hz to
30Hz range.
If this is a problem, set the Pr. 72 "PWM frecuency selection" to 6kHz or higher.
When setting the PWM to a higher frequency, check for noise or leakage current
problem and take countermeasures against it.
(4) Operation
WARNING
When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will
restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been
made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.
Do not modify the equipment.

CAUTION
The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor
from overheating.
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent
starting/stopping of the inverter.
Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power harmonics from the
inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator.
When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or
surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants
may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the
factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation.
The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
safety.
Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
perform inspection and test operation.

A-3

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
Treat as industrial waste.
(8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter
without a cover, or partially open. Never operate the inverter like this. Always
replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.

A-4

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CONTENTS
1. WIRING 1
1.1 Japanese Version.....................................................................................2

Contents
1.1.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals............................................... 3
1.2 North America Version .............................................................................4
1.2.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................... 4
1.2.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals............................................... 5
1.3 European Version.....................................................................................7
1.3.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................... 7
1.3.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals............................................... 8
1.4 Description of I/O Terminal Specifications ...............................................9
1.4.1 Main circuit .................................................................................................. 9
1.4.2 Control circuit .............................................................................................. 9
1.5 How to Use the Main Circuit Terminals..................................................11
1.5.1 Cables, wiring lengths, crimping terminals, etc. ..................................... 11
1.5.2 Wiring instructions .................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Peripheral devices .................................................................................... 13
1.5.4 Leakage current and installation of earth leakage circuit breaker...... 15
1.5.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) ................................................. 17
1.5.6 Regarding the installation of the power factor improving reactor ....... 18
1.5.7 Regarding noise and the installation of a noise filter.............................. 18
1.5.8 Grounding precautions............................................................................. 19
1.5.9 Regarding power harmonics..................................................................... 20
1.5.10 Japanese power harmonic suppression guideline............................... 20
1.6 How to Use the Control Circuit Terminals ..............................................24
1.6.1 Terminal block layout................................................................................ 24
1.6.2 Wiring instructions .................................................................................... 24
1.6.3 Changing the control logic........................................................................ 25
1.7 Input Terminals.......................................................................................28
1.7.1 Run (start) and stop (STF, STR, STOP)................................................. 28
1.7.2 Connection of frequency setting potentiometer and output frequency
meter (10, 2, 5, 4, AU).............................................................................. 31
1.7.3 External frequency selection (REX, RH, RM, RL).................................. 32
1.7.4 Indicator connection and adjustment ...................................................... 34
1.7.5 Control circuit common terminals (SD, 5, SE)........................................ 37
1.7.6 Signal inputs by contactless switches ..................................................... 37
1.8 How to Use the Input Signals
(Assigned Terminals RL, RM, RH, STR)................................................38
1.8.1 Multi-speed setting (RL, RM, RH, REX signals): Setting "0, 1, 2, 8"
Remote setting (RL, RM, RH signals): Setting "0, 1, 2"......................... 38
1.8.2 Second function selection (RT signal): Setting "3"................................. 38
I

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.8.3 Current input selection "AU signal": Setting "4"...................................... 38
1.8.4 Start self-holding selection (STOP signal): Setting "5"........................... 38
1.8.5 Output shut-off (MRS signal): Setting "6"................................................ 39
1.8.6 External thermal relay input: Setting "7".................................................. 39
1.8.7 Jog operation (JOG signal): Setting "9" .................................................. 40
1.8.8 Reset signal: Setting "10"......................................................................... 40
1.8.9 PID control valid terminal: Setting "14".................................................... 41
1.8.10 PU operation/external operation switching: Setting "16" ..................... 41
1.9 Handling of the RS-485 Connector
(Type with RS-485 Communication Function) .......................................41
1.10 Design Information ...............................................................................44
2. FUNCTIONS 45
2.1 Function (Parameter) List.......................................................................46
2.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use...................................56
2.3 Explanation of Functions (Parameters)..................................................58
2.3.1 Torque boost ........................................................................... 58
2.3.2 Maximum and minimum frequency ....................................... 59
2.3.3 Base frequency, Base frequency voltage .................... 59
2.3.4 Multi-speed operation to to ....... 61
2.3.5 Acceleration/deceleration time ................... 62
2.3.6 Electronic overcurrent protection .................................................... 64
2.3.7 DC injection brake ......................................................... 64
2.3.8 Starting frequency ........................................................................... 65
2.3.9 Load pattern selection ..................................................................... 66
2.3.10 Jog frequency ....................................................................... 67
2.3.11 RUN key rotation direction selection ............................................. 67
2.3.12 Stall prevention function and current limit function ...................... 68
2.3.13 Stall prevention ............................................................ 69
2.3.14 Acceleration/deceleration pattern ................................................. 71
2.3.15 Extended function display selection ............................................. 72
2.3.16 Frequency jump to ............................................................... 72
2.3.17 Speed display ................................................................................ 73
2.3.18 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
to .......................................................................... 74
2.3.19 Start-time ground fault detection selection .................................. 78
2.4 Output Terminal Function Parameters ...................................................78
2.4.1 Up-to-frequency sensitivity .............................................................. 78
2.4.2 Output frequency detection .................................................... 79
2.5 Current Detection Function Parameters.................................................80
2.5.1 Output current detection functions ........................................ 80
2.5.2 Zero current detection ............................................................ 81
2.6 Display Function Parameters .................................................................82
2.6.1 Monitor display ........................................................................ 82
II

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.6.2 Setting dial function selection ......................................................... 83
2.6.3 Monitoring reference .............................................................. 84
2.7 Restart Operation Parameters ...............................................................84
2.7.1 Restart setting ......................................................................... 84
2.8 Additional Function Parameters .............................................................86

Contents
2.8.1 Remote setting function selection .................................................. 86
2.9 Terminal Function Selection Parameters ...............................................88
2.9.1 Input terminal function selection .......................... 88
2.9.2 Output terminal function selection ......................................... 90
2.10 Operation Selection Function Parameters ...........................................91
2.10.1 Retry function ..................................................... 91
2.10.2 PWM carrier frequency ........................................................ 92
2.10.3 Applied motor ................................................................................. 93
2.10.4 Voltage input selection .................................................................. 93
2.10.5 Input filter time constant ................................................................ 94
2.10.6 Reset selection/PU stop selection ................................................ 94
2.10.7 Cooling fan operation selection .................................................... 96
2.10.8 Parameter write inhibit selection .................................................. 97
2.10.9 Reverse rotation prevention selection .......................................... 98
2.10.10 Operation mode selection ........................................................... 98
2.10.11 PID control to .................................................................... 101
2.11 Auxiliary Function Parameters ...........................................................109
2.11.1 Slip compensation ..................................................... 109
2.11.2 Automatic torque boost selection ............................................... 109
2.11.3 Motor primary resistance ............................................................ 111
2.12 Calibration Parameters ......................................................................111
2.12.1 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Japanese version) ......... 111
2.12.2 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (NA and EC version) ...... 113
2.13 Clear Parameters ...............................................................................115
2.13.1 Parameter clear ........................................................................... 115
2.13.2 Alarm history clear ....................................................................... 115
2.14 Communication Parameters
(Only for the type having the RS-485 communication function)...........116
2.14.1 Communication settings to , ...................................... 118
2.14.2 Operation and speed command write ............................... 130
2.14.3 Link start mode selection ............................................................ 131
2
2.14.4 E PROM write selection .............................................................. 132
2.15 Parameter Unit (FR-PU04) Setting ....................................................133
2.15.1 Parameter unit display language switching ............................... 133
2.15.2 Buzzer sound control .................................................................. 133
2.15.3 PU contrast adjustment ............................................................... 134
2.15.4 PU main display screen data selection ...................................... 134
2.15.5 PU disconnection detection/PU setting lock .............................. 135

III

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 136
3.1 Errors (Alarms) .....................................................................................137
3.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions.......................................................................... 137
3.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm
(Only when FR-PU04 is used)............................................................... 145
3.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters...................... 145
3.1.4 Resetting the inverter ............................................................................. 145
3.2 Troubleshooting....................................................................................146
3.2.1 Motor remains stopped .......................................................................... 146
3.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction ........................................................ 147
3.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting.................................................... 147
3.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ............................................... 147
3.2.5 Motor current is large.............................................................................. 147
3.2.6 Speed does not increase ....................................................................... 147
3.2.7 Speed varies during operation............................................................... 147
3.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly.............................................. 148
3.2.9 Operation panel display is not operating............................................... 148
3.2.10 Parameter write cannot be performed ................................................ 148
3.2.11 Motor produces annoying sound......................................................... 148
3.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection .......................................149
3.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection........................................ 149
3.3.2 Check items ............................................................................................ 149
3.3.3 Periodic inspection.................................................................................. 149
3.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger................................................ 150
3.3.5 Pressure test........................................................................................... 150
3.3.6 Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................. 150
3.3.7 Replacement of parts ............................................................................. 154
3.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers .............. 157
4. SPECIFICATIONS 160
4.1 Specification List ..................................................................................161
4.1.1 Ratings .................................................................................................... 161
4.1.2 Common specifications .......................................................................... 165
4.2 Outline Drawings ..................................................................................167
5. INSTRUCTIONS 170
5.1 Selecting Instructions ...........................................................................171
5.2 Peripheral Selecting Instructions..........................................................171
5.3 Operating Instructions ..........................................................................173
5.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor .........................................................175
APPENDIX 176
APPENDIX 1 PARAMETER DATA CODE LIST ........................................177

IV

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1. WIRING
This chapter explains the basic "wiring" for use of this
product. Always read the instructions before use.
For description of "installation", refer to the instruction
manual (basic).

1.1 Japanese Version ......................................................2


1.2 North America Version...............................................4
1.3 European Version ......................................................7
1.4 Description of I/O Terminal specification ....................9
1.5 How to Use the Main Circuit Terminals ....................11
1.6 How to Use the Control Circuit Terminals ................24
1.7 Input Terminals ........................................................28
1.8 How to Use the Input Signals
(Assigned Terminals RL, RM, RH, STR) ..................38
1.9 Handling of the RS-485 Connector
(Type with RS-485 Communication Function) ..........41
1.10 Design Information.................................................44

<Abbreviations>
PU Chapter11
Control panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04)
Inverter
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-S500 series
FR-S500 Chapter 2
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter FR-S500 series
Pr.
Parameter number
Chapter 3

Chapter 4

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.1 Japanese Version
1.1.1 Terminal connection diagram
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K (-R) (-C)
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K (-R)
NFB MC Inverter Motor
3-phase AC R U
power supply S V IM
T W
External transistor common Ground
P1
24VDC power supply PC Power factor improving
Contact input common (source) DC reactor
(FR-BEL: Option)
Be careful not to short P
terminals PC-SD. Jumper: Remove this
N jumper when FR-BEL
Forward rotation start STF is connected.

Reverse rotation start STR *5 *6 A


High RH *5 *6 B Alarm
*6 C output
Multi-speed selection Middle RM *5
Low RL *5 Operation status
*6RUN Running
Contact input common SD output
(Note) SE Open collector Open
output common collector
Control input signals SINK outputs
(No voltage input allowed) (*3)
SOURCE
Frequency setting signals (Analog) Indicator
1mA full-scale
Frequency 3 10 (+5V) Analog meter
setting 2 (Digital indicator)
2 DC 0 to 5V Selected
potentiometer DC 0 to 10V FM 1mA
1/2W1k 1 5 (Common) (+) (-)
(*4) Calibration
Current input (-) resistor (*2)
4 to 20mADC (+) 4 (4 to 20mADC)
SD
When using the current input as
the frequency setting signal, set
"4" in any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input
terminal function selection), assign RS-485 Connector (*1)
AU (current input selection) to any
of terminals RH, RM, RL and STR, Earth (Ground)
and turn on the AU signal.
Main circuit terminal Control circuit input terminal Control circuit output terminal
REMARKS
*1 Only the type with RS-485 communication function.
*2 Not needed when the setting dial is used for calibration. This resistor is used
when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a
remote frequency meter. Note that the needle of the frequency meter may not
deflect to full-scale when the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use
both the resistor and setting dial for calibration.
*3 You can switch between the sink and source logic positions. Refer to page 25.
*4 When the setting potentiometer is used frequently, use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.
*5 The terminal functions change with input terminal function selection (Pr. 60 to
Pr. 63). (Refer to page 38, 88) (RES, RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, STOP, MRS, OH,
REX, JOG, X14, X16, (STR) signal selection)
*6 The terminal functions change with output terminal function selection (Pr. 64,
Pr. 65). (Refer to page 90) (RUN, SU, OL, FU, RY, Y12, Y13, FDN, FUP, RL,
LF, ABC signal selection)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm (3.94inches)
away from the power cables.
FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K (-R) (-C)
FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K (-R)
NFB MC
Motor
R U
Power supply V IM
S
W Earth
(Ground)
REMARKS
• To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic contactor and earth
leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse breaker, and use the magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
• The output is three-phase 200V.
1.1.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals
FR-S520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K (-R) (-C)
FR-S520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K (-R) (-C) FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K (-R)
Jumper
Jumper
N P

N P1 P
P1
R S T U V W
R S T U V W
IM
IM
Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
FR-S520S-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K (-R) FR-S520S-1.5K (-R)
Jumper
Jumper
N P

N P1 P
P1
R S U V W
R S U V W
IM
IM 1
Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
FR-S510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K (-R) FR-S510W-0.75K (-R)

N P N P

R S U V W
R S U V W
IM
IM
Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
CAUTION
• The power supply cables must be connected to R, S, T. If they are connected to U, V, W,
the inverter will be damaged. (Phase sequence need not be matched.)
For use with a single-phase power supply, the power supply cables must be connected to
R and S.
• Connect the motor to U, V, W.
Turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) at this time rotates the motor
counterclockwise when viewed from the load shaft.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.2 North America Version
1.2.1 Terminal connection diagram
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K-NA
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-NA (R)
Inverter
NFB MC Motor
3-phase AC R U
power supply S V IM
T W
Earth
(Ground)
External transistor common P1
24VDC power supply PC Power factor improving
Contact input common (source) DC reactor
(FR-BEL: Option)
Take care not to short P
terminals PC-SD. Jumper: Remove this
N jumper when FR-BEL
Forward rotation start STF is connected.

Reverse rotation start STR *4 *5 A


High RH *4 *5 B Alarm
*5 C output
Multi-speed selection Middle RM *4
Low RL *4 Operation status
*5RUN Running
Contact input common SD output
SE Open collector Open
Control input signals output common collector
(No voltage input allowed) outputs
SINK
(*2)
Frequency setting signals (Analog) SOURCE
Frequency 3 10 (+5V)
setting 2
2 DC 0 to 5V Selected
potentiometer DC 0 to 10V
1/2W1k 1 5 (Common)
(*3) Current input (-) AM (+) Analog signal
4 to 20mADC (+) 4 (4 to 20mADC) output
When using the current input as 5 (-) (0 to 5VDC)
the frequency setting signal, set
"4" in any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input RS-485 Connector (*1)
terminal function selection), assign
AU (current input selection) to any Earth (Ground)
of terminals RH, RM, RL and STR,
and turn on the AU signal.
Main circuit terminal Control circuit input terminal Control circuit output terminal
REMARKS
*1 Only the type with RS-485 communication function.
*2 You can switch between the sink and source logic positions. Refer to page 25.
*3 When the setting potentiometer is used frequently, use a 2W 1kΩ potentiometer.
*4 The terminal functions change with input terminal function selection (Pr. 60 to
Pr. 63). (Refer to page 38, 88) (RES, RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, STOP, MRS, OH,
REX, JOG, X14, X16, (STR) signal selection)
*5 The terminal functions change with output terminal function selection (Pr. 64,
Pr. 65). (Refer to page 90) (RUN, SU, OL, FU, RY, Y12, Y13, FDN, FUP, RL,
LF, ABC signal selection)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


NOTE
To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm
(3.94inches) away from the power cables.
FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K-NA
NFB MC
Motor
Power supply R U
S V IM
W
Earth
(Ground)
REMARKS
• To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic contactor
and earth leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse breaker, and use the magnetic
contactor to switch power on-off.
• The output is three-phase 200V.
1.2.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals
FR-S520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K-NA
FR-S520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K-NA
FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K-NA (R)
Jumper
Jumper
N P

N P1 P
P1
R S T U V W
R S T U V W
IM
IM
Power Motor
Power Motor supply
supply

FR-S510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K-NA FR-S510W-0.75K-NA


1

N P N P

R S U V W
R S U V W
IM

Power Motor IM
supply Power Motor
supply

CAUTION
• The power supply cables must be connected to R, S, T. If they are connected to
U, V, W, the inverter will be damaged. (Phase sequence need not be matched.)
• Connect the motor to U, V, W.
Turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) at this time rotates the motor
counterclockwise when viewed from the load shaft.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<When single-phase power input is provided for three-phase power input
inverter (NA version only)>
Reduce the output current.
FR-S520- K-NA inverter 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Rated output current (A) 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 7.0
Power supply capacity (kVA) 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.0
AC input current (A) 1.1 2.4 4.5 6.4 11.2 12.9 17.4

Set m9 (Pr. 637) "current detection filter".


Setting "801" in the manufacturer setting parameter C8 enables you to set the m9
parameter.
CAUTION
Parameters other than m9 can also be made to be displayed, but never alter these
since they are manufacturer setting parameters.

m9 Setting Description
0 Single-phase power input
---
Three-phase power input
(Factory setting)

CAUTION
Always return the C8 parameter to 0 (factory setting) after you have finished the
setting of m9.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.3 European Version
1.3.1 Terminal connection diagram
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-EC(R)
NFB MC Inverter Motor
3-phase AC L1 U
power supply L2 V IM
L3 W
Earth
Control input signals (Ground)
(No voltage input allowed) P1
Power factor improving
Contact input common PC DC reactor
(FR-BEL: Option)
Forward rotation start STF
Jumper: Remove this
Reverse rotation start STR *4 jumper when FR-BEL
is connected.
High RH *4
Multi-speed selection Middle RM *4 *5 A
Low RL *4 *5 B Alarm
*5 C output
External transistor common
24VDC power supply SD Operation status
Contact input common (sink)
*5RUN Running
output
SE Open collector Open
Take care not to short output common collector
terminals PC-SD. outputs
SINK
(*2)
Frequency setting signals (Analog) SOURCE
Frequency 3 10 (+5V)
setting 2
2 DC 0 to 5V Selected
potentiometer DC 0 to 10V
1/2W1k 1 5 (Common)
(*3) Current input (-) AM (+) Analog signal
4 to 20mADC (+) 4 (4 to 20mADC) output
5 (-) (0 to 5VDC)
When using the current input as
the frequency setting signal, set 1
"4" in any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input RS-485 Connector (*1)
terminal function selection), assign
Earth (Ground)
AU (current input selection) to any
of terminals RH, RM, RL and STR,
and turn on the AU signal.
Main circuit terminal Control circuit input terminal Control circuit output terminal

REMARKS
*1 Only the type with RS-485 communication function.
*2 You can switch between the sink and source logic positions. Refer to page 25.
*3 When the setting potentiometer is used frequently, use a 2W 1kΩ potentiometer.
*4 The terminal functions change with input terminal function selection (Pr. 60 to
Pr. 63). (Refer to page 38, 88) (RES, RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, STOP, MRS, OH,
REX, JOG, X14, X16, (STR) signal selection)
*5 The terminal functions change with output terminal function selection (Pr. 64,
Pr. 65). (Refer to page 90) (RUN, SU, OL, FU, RY, Y12, Y13, FDN, FUP, RL,
LF, ABC signal selection)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


FR-S520S-0.2K to 1.5K-EC (R)
NFB MC
Motor
Power supply L1 U
N V IM
W
Earth
(Ground)
REMARKS
• To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic
contactor and earth leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse breaker, and use the
magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
• The output is three-phase 200V.
NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm
(3.94inches) away from the power cables.

1.3.2 Layout and wiring of main circuit terminals


FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K-EC (R)

Jumper
- +

P1
L1 L2 L3 U V W

IM

Power Motor
supply
FR-S520S-0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K-EC (R) FR-S520S-1.5K-EC (R)
Jumper
Jumper
- +

- P1 +
P1
L1 N U V W
L1 N U V W
IM
IM
Power Motor
Power Motor supply
supply

CAUTION
• Connect the motor to U, V, W.
Turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) at this time rotates the motor
counterclockwise when viewed from the load shaft.
• For power input wiring, connect L1 to R/L1 of the terminal block and N to S/L2 of
the terminal block.
• Do not connect the power supply to U, V and W.

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.4 Description of I/O Terminal Specifications
1.4.1 Main circuit
Symbol Terminal Name Description
R, S, T * AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply.
<L1, L2, L3>
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
DC voltage DC voltage common terminal. Not isolated from the
N<-> power supply and inverter output.
common
Power factor Disconnect the jumper from terminals P<+>-P1 and
improving DC connect the optional power factor improving DC reactor
P<+>, P1 (FR-BEL). (The single-phase 100V power input model
reactor connection
cannot be connected.)
Earth (Ground) For grounding the inverter chassis. Must be earthed.
* R, S <L1, N> terminals for single-phase power input.
CAUTION
< >Terminal names in parentheses are those of the EC version.

1.4.2 Control circuit


Symbol Terminal Name Description
Turn on the STF signal When the STF and STR
Forward rotation to start forward rotation signals are turned on
STF start and turn it off to stop. simultaneously, the stop
Contact input

Turn on the STR signal command


Reverse rotation to start reverse rotation is given.
STR start and turn it off to stop. Input terminal
function selection
Turn on the RH, RM and RL signals (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)
in appropriate combinations to select changes the
RH Multi-speed multiple speeds.
RM terminal functions.
selection The priorities of the speed commands (*4)
RL are in order of jog, multi-speed setting
(RH, RM, RL, REX) and AU.
Common terminal for contact inputs (terminals STF, STR,
SD Contact input RH, RM, RL) and indicator connection (terminal FM).
(*1) common (sink) Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector 1
Input signals

External output), such as a programmable controller (PLC),


transistor connect the positive external power supply for transistor
common output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by
PC undesirable current.
(*1) 24VDC power
supply This terminal can be used as a 24V 0.1A DC power
Contact input output across terminals PC-SD.
common (source) When source logic is selected, this terminal serves as a
contact input signal common.
10 Frequency setting 5VDC. Permissible load current 10mA.
power supply
By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum
Frequency output frequency is reached at 5V (10V) and I/O are
Frequency setting

2 setting proportional. Use Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" to switch


(Voltage signal) between 5V and 10V.
Input resistance 10kΩ. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.
Enter 4-20mADC. This signal is factory-adjusted to reach
0Hz at 4mA and 60Hz at 20mA. Maximum permissible
Frequency input current 30mA. Input resistance approximately 250Ω.
4 setting For current input, turn on the signal AU.
(Current signal) Set the AU signal in any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input
terminal function selection).

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Symbol Terminal Name Description
Input signals

Frequency Common terminal for the frequency setting signals


5 setting input (terminals 2, 4) and indicator connection (terminal AM).
common Isolated from terminals SD and SE. Do not earth.

Change-over contact output indicating


that the output has been stopped by the
A inverter's protective function activated.
B Alarm output 230V 0.3A AC, 30V 0.3A DC. Alarm: Output
C discontinuity across B-C (continuity terminal
across A-C), normal: continuity across function
B-C (discontinuity across A-C). (*6) selection
Open collector

(Pr. 64, Pr. 65)


Switched low when the inverter output changes the
frequency is equal to or higher than the terminal
RUN Inverter running starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz, functions. (*5)
variable). Switched high during stop or
Output signals

DC injection brake operation. (*2)


Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A DC.

SE Open collector Common terminal for inverter running terminal RUN.


output common Isolated from terminals 5 and SD.
<Japanese>

Factory setting of output item:


Pulse

Frequency
FM

For meter One selected from


output frequency Permissible load current 1mA
1440 pulses/s at 60Hz
Indicator

and motor current is


output.
The output signal is
<NA, EC>

proportional to the Factory setting of output item:


Analog

Analog signal magnitude of each Frequency


AM

output monitoring item. Output signal 0 to 5VDC


Permissible load current 1mA
Communication

Using the parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB201 to


RS-485 connector 205), the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is connectable.
−− (*3) Communication operation can be performed through
RS-485.

*1. Do not connect terminals SD and PC each other or to the earth.


For sink logic, terminal SD acts as the common terminal of contact input. For
source logic, terminal PC acts as the common terminal of contact input. (Refer
to page 25 for the way to switch between them.)
*2. Low indicates that the open collector outputting transistor is on (conducts).
High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*3. Compatible with only the type having RS-485 communication function.
(Refer to page 41.)
*4. RL, RM, RH, RT, AU, STOP, MRS, OH, REX, JOG, RES, X14, X16, (STR)
signal selection (Refer to page 88.)
*5. RUN, SU, OL, FU, RY, Y12, Y13, FDN, FUP, RL, LF, ABC signal selection
(Refer to page 90.)
*6. To be compatible with the European Directive (Low Voltage Directive), the
operating capacity of relay outputs (A, B, C) should be 30V 0.3A DC.
10

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5 How to Use the Main Circuit Terminals
1.5.1 Cables, wiring lengths, crimping terminals, etc.
The following selection example assumes the wiring length of 20m (65.62feet).
1) FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K (-R) (-C)
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K-NA
PVC
Applicable Terminal Tightening Crimping Cables Insulated
Inverter Screw Torque Terminals Cables
Model Size Nm mm2 AWG mm2
R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W R, S, T U, V, W
FR-S520-0.1K
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
to 0.75K
FR-S520-
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
1.5K, 2.2K
FR-S520-3.7K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 2.5
2) FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K (-R)
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-NA (R)
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-EC (R)
PVC
Crimping Cables Insulated
Applicable Terminal Tightening Terminals Cables
Inverter Screw Torque mm2 AWG mm2
Model Size Nm R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T R, S, T
<L1, L2, U, V, W <L1, L2, U, V, W <L1, L2, U, V, W <L1, L2, U, V, W
L3> L3> L3> L3>
FR-S540-0.4K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
to 3.7K
3) FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K (-R)
FR-S520S-0.2K to 1.5K-EC (R)
PVC
Crimping Cables Insulated
Applicable Terminal Tightening Terminals Cables
Inverter Screw Torque 2
mm AWG mm2
Model Size Nm
R, S R, S R, S R, S 1
U, V, W U, V, W U, V, W U, V, W
<L1, N> <L1, N> <L1, N> <L1, N>
FR-S520S-
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
0.1K to 0.75K
FR-S520S-
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
1.5K
4) FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K (-R)
FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K-NA
PVC
Crimping Cables Insulated
Applicable Terminal Tightening Terminals Cables
Inverter Screw Torque
Model Size Nm mm2 AWG mm2
R, S
R, S U, V, W R, S U, V, W R, S U, V, W U, V, W
<L1, N>
FR-S510W-
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5
0.1K to 0.4K
FR-S510W-
M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 12 14 4 2.5
0.75K

11

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Wiring length
100m (328.08feet) maximum. (50m (164.04feet) maximum for the FR-S540-0.4K.)
CAUTION
• When the wiring length of the 0.1K or 0.2K is 30m (98.43feet) or more, use the
carrier frequency to 1kHz.
• Use the carrier frequency of 1kHz when the wiring length of the FR-S540-0.4K,
0.75K is 30m (98.43feet) or more.
• The wiring length should be 30m (98.43feet) maximum when automatic torque
boost is selected in Pr. 98 "automatic torque boost selection (motor capacity)".
(Refer to page 109)

1.5.2 Wiring instructions


1) Use insulation-sleeved crimping terminals for the power supply and motor cables.

2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage
the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
3) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter
clean.
When drilling a control box etc., take care not to let wire off-cuts enter the inverter.

4) Use cables of the recommended size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum.


If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable
voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a
low frequency.

5) For long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may be reduced or
the devices connected to the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty
under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of wiring.
Therefore, note the maximum overall wiring length.

6) Electromagnetic wave interference


The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which
may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the
inverter. In this case, install the optional FR-BIF radio noise filter (for use in the
input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference.
7) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF
option) in the output side of the inverter.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be
damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, remove them. (When using
the FR-BIF radio noise filter with a single-phase power supply, connect it to the
input side of the inverter after isolating the T <L3> phase securely.)

8) Before starting rewiring or other work after performing operation once, check the
voltage with a meter etc. more than 10 minutes after power-off. For some time after
power-off, there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.

12

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5.3 Peripheral devices
(1) Selection of peripheral devices
Check the capacity of the motor applicable to the inverter you purchased. Appropriate
peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
1) FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K (-R) (-C)
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K-NA
Rated current of Magnetic
Power Power Cables (mm2)
Motor Factor Factor (*2)
Circuit Breaker Contactor
Output Inverter Improving Improving
(Refer to (MC)
(kW Model AC Reactor DC Reactor
page 15) (Refer to R, S, T U, V, W
(HP)) (Refer to (Refer to
(*1) page 17)
page 18) page 18)
0.1 FR-S520- FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K
30AF/5A S-N10 2 2
(1/8) 0.1K (*3) (*3)
0.2 FR-S520- FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K
30AF/5A S-N10 2 2
(1/4) 0.2K (*3) (*3)
0.4 FR-S520-
30AF/5A S-N10 FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K 2 2
(1/2) 0.4K
0.75 FR-S520- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/10A S-N10 2 2
(1) 0.75K 0.75K 0.75K
1.5 FR-S520-
30AF/15A S-N10 FR-BAL-1.5K FR-BEL-1.5K 2 2
(2) 1.5K
2.2 FR-S520- S-N11,
30AF/20A FR-BAL-2.2K FR-BEL-2.2K 2 2
(3) 2.2K S-N12
3.7 FR-S520-
30AF/30A S-N20 FR-BAL-3.7K FR-BAL-3.7K 3.5 3.5
(5) 3.7K

2) FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K (-R)


FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-NA (R)
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-EC (R)
Power Power Cables (mm2)
Motor
Rated current of Magnetic
Factor Factor (*2)
1
Circuit Breaker Contactor
Output Inverter Improving Improving
(Refer to (MC) R, S, T
(kW Model AC Reactor DC Reactor
page 15) (Refer to <L1, L2, U, V, W
(HP)) (Refer to (Refer to
(*1) page 17) L3>
page 18) page 18)
0.4 FR-S540- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/5A S-N10 2 2
(1/2) 0.4K H0.4K H0.4K
0.75 FR-S540- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/5A S-N10 2 2
(1) 0.75K H0.75K H0.75K
1.5 FR-S540- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/10A S-N10 2 2
(2) 1.5K H1.5K H1.5K
2.2 FR-S540- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/15A S-N20 2 2
(3) 2.2K H2.2K H2.2K
3.7 FR-S540- FR-BAL- FR-BAL-
30AF/20A S-N20 2 2
(5) 3.7K H3.7K H3.7K

13

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3) FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K (-R)
FR-S520S-0.2K to 1.5K-EC (R)
Power Power Cables (mm2)
Rated current of Magnetic Factor Factor (*2)
Motor
Circuit Breaker Contactor Improving Improving
Output Inverter
(Refer to (MC) AC Reactor DC Reactor
(kW Model R, S
page 15) (Refer to (Refer to (Refer to U, V, W
(HP)) <L1, N>
(*1) page 17) page 18) page 18)
(*3) (*3)
0.1 FR-S520S-
30AF/5A S-N10 FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K 2 2
(1/8) 0.1K
0.2 FR-S520S-
30AF/10A S-N10 FR-BAL-0.4K FR-BEL-0.4K 2 2
(1/4) 0.2K
0.4 FR-S520S- FR-BAL- FR-BEL-
30AF/10A S-N20 2 2
(1/2) 0.4K 0.75K 0.75K
0.75 FR-S520S-
30AF/15A S-N20 FR-BAL-1.5K FR-BEL-1.5K 2 2
(1) 0.75K
1.5 FR-S520S-
30AF/20A S-N21 FR-BAL-2.2K FR-BEL-2.2K 2 2
(2) 1.5K

4) FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K (-R)


FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K-NA
Power Power Cables (mm2)
Rated current of Magnetic Factor Factor (*2)
Motor
Circuit Breaker Contactor Improving Improving
Output Inverter
(Refer to (MC) AC Reactor DC Reactor
(kW Model R, S
page 15) (Refer to (Refer to (Refer to U, V, W
(HP)) <L1, N>
(*1) page 17) page 18) page 18)
(*3) (*4)
0.1 FR-S510W- FR-BAL-
30AF/10A S-N10 −− 2 2
(1/8) 0.1K 0.75K
0.2 FR-S510W-
30AF/15A S-N10 FR-BAL-1.5K −− 2 2
(1/4) 0.2K
0.4 FR-S510W-
30AF/20A S-N20 FR-BAL-2.2K −− 2 2
(1/2) 0.4K
0.75 FR-S510W-
30AF/30A S-N20 FR-BAL-3.7K −− 3.5 2
(1) 0.75K
*1 For installations in the United States or Canada, the circuit breaker must be
inverse time or instantaneous trip type.
*2 The size of the cables assume that the wiring length is 20m (65.62feet).
*3 The power factor may be slightly less.
*4 The single-phase 100V power input model does not allow the power factor
improving DC reactor to be fitted.

14

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5.4 Leakage current and installation of earth leakage circuit breaker
Due to static capacitances existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage
currents flow through them. Since their values depend on the static capacitances,
carrier frequency, etc., take the following counter measures.
(1) To-ground leakage currents
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the
other line through the ground cable, etc.
These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth
leakage relays unnecessarily.
Counter measures
If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of
the inverter.
Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM control (Pr. 70) will make
it unoffending. (Factory setting)
By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge
suppression (e.g. Mitsubishi's Progressive Super Series) in the inverter's own line
and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high
(with low noise).
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage NFB Thermal relay Motor
currents flowing in static Power
capacities between the Inverter IM
supply
inverter output cables
Line static
may operate the external
capacitances
thermal relay
unnecessarily. Line-to-Line Leakage Current Path

Counter measures
Use the electronic overcurrent protection of the inverter.
Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of
Soft-PWM (Pr. 70) makes it unoffending.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is 1
recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
Installation and selection of no-fuse breaker
On the power receiving side, install a no-fuse breaker (NFB) to protect the primary
wiring of the inverter. Which NFB to choose depends on the power supply side
power factor (which changes with the power supply voltage, output frequency and
load) of the inverter. Especially as the completely electromagnetic type NFB
changes in operational characteristic with harmonic currents, you need to choose
the one of a little larger capacity. (Check the data of the corresponding breaker.)
For the earth leakage circuit breaker, use our product designed for harmonic and
surge suppression (Progressive Super Series). (Refer to page 13 for the
recommended models.)
CAUTION
Choose the NFB type according to the power supply capacity.

15

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(3) Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit
breaker
When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated
sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
Progressive Super Series Example of leakage Leakage current
(Type SP, CF, SF, CP) current per 1km in cable example of 3-phase
Rated sensitivity current: path during commercial induction motor
I∆n ≥ 10 × (lg1+Ign+lg2+lgm) power supply operation during commercial
Conventional NV series (Type CA, when the CV cable is power supply
CS, SS produced prior to '91) routed in metal conduit operation
Rated sensitivity current: (200V 60Hz) (200V 60Hz)
I∆n ≥ 10 × {lg1+lgn+3 × (lg2+lgm)} 2.0

Leakage current (mA)

Leakage current (mA)


120
lg1, lg2 : Leakage currents of cable 100 1.0
path during commercial 80 0.7
0.5
power supply operation 60
0.3
lgn* : Leakage current of noise 40
0.2
filter on inverter input side 20
0 0.1
lgm : Leakage current of motor 2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 152237 55
during commercial power 5.5 30 60100 2.2 5.5 1118.5 3045
supply operation Cable size (mm 2 ) Motor capacity (kW)
<Example>
2mm2 ×5m 2mm2 ×70m
(16.40feet) (229.66feet)
Noise
NV filter 3
Inver- IM 200V
ter 1.5kW
(2HP)
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
CAUTION
• The earth leakage circuit breaker should be installed to the primary (power
supply) side of the inverter.
• In the connection neutral point grounded system, the sensitivity current
becomes worse for ground faults in the inverter secondary side. Hence, the
protective grounding of the load equipment should be 10Ω or less.
• When the breaker is installed in the secondary side of the inverter, it may be
unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the rating. In this
case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss increase and
the temperature rises.
* Note the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input
side.
Progressive Super Series Conventional NV
(Type SP, CF, SF,CP) (Type CA, CS, SS)
5m (16.40feet)
Leakage current (Ig1) (mA) 20 × = 0.10
1000m (3280.80feet)
Leakage current (Ign) (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
70m (229.66feet)
Leakage current (Ig2) (mA) 20 × = 1.40
1000m (3280.80feet)
Motor leakage 0.14
current (Igm) (mA)
Total leakage current (mA) 1.66 4.78
Rated sensitivity current 30 100
(mA) ( ≥ Ig × 10)

16

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
CAUTION
Do not use the inverter power supply side magnetic contactor to start or stop the
inverter.

As shown on the right, NFB MC


always use the start signal R<L1> U
(ON or OFF across Power To
S<N> V
supply motor
terminals STF or STR-SD)
T W
to make a start or stop.
F
(Refer to page 28)
B
ON OFF
OFF
MC
MC C

ON Inverter
MC
RA
OFF RA
RA
STF (STR)
SD
Inverter Start/Stop Circuit Example
(1) Inverter's primary side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter's primary side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following
purposes (Refer to page 13 for selection.):
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter's protective
function is activated or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency stop
operation).
2) To prevent an accident caused by an automatic restart made at power restoration 1
after an inverter stop due to a power failure.
3) To rest the inverter for a long time.
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little
power. When stopping the inverter for a long time, switching inverter power off
saves power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safety of
maintenance/inspection work.
As the inverter's primary MC is used for the above purposes, it is equivalent to the
standard duty and select the one of class JEM1038-AC3 for the inverter input side
current.

17

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5.6 Regarding the installation of the power factor improving reactor
When the inverter is installed near a large-capacity power transformer (500kVA or
more at the wiring length of 10m (32.81feet) or less) or the power capacitor is to be
switched, an excessive peak current will flow in the power supply input circuit,
damaging the converter circuit. In such a case, always install the power factor
improving reactor (FR-BEL or FR-BAL).

Power supply equipment


FR-BAL Inverter
NFB
R X 1500 Power factor
R<L1> U
Power improving reactor
S Y 1000
S<N> V

capacity (kVA)
supply installation range
T Z T W 500
P<+>P1

0 10
FR-BEL(*) Wiring length (m)

REMARKS
* When connecting the FR-BEL, remove the jumper across terminals P<+>-P1.
The wiring length between FR-BEL and inverter should be 5m (16.40feet)
maximum and as short as possible.
Use the cables which are equal in size to those of the main circuit. (Refer to page
11)

1.5.7 Regarding noise and the installation of a noise filter


Some noise enters the inverter causing it to malfunction and others are generated by
the inverter causing the malfunction of peripheral devices. Though the inverter is
designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the
following general counter measures to be taken.

General counter measures


Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in
parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables
and connect the sheathes of the shield cables to terminal SD.
Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
Capacitances exist between the inverter's I/O wiring, other cables, earth and
motor, through which leakage currents flow to cause the earth leakage circuit
breaker, earth leakage relay and external thermal relay to operate unnecessarily.
To prevent this, take appropriate measures, e.g. set the carrier frequency in Pr. 72
to a low value, use an earth leakage circuit breaker designed for suppression of
harmonics and surges, and use the electronic overcurrent protection built in the
inverter.
18

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Noise reduction examples
FR-BLF Control Reduce carrier
Install filter FR-BLF
FR-BSF01 box frequency. Install filter
FR-BSF01
on inverter's input side. on inverter's output side.
Inverter FR- FR-
power supply BLF Inverter BLF IM Motor
Install filter FR-BIF
on inverter's input side. FR- Use 4-core cable for motor
BIF power cable and use one
Separate inverter and power
cable as earth cable.
line more than 30cm (3.94inches)
(at least 10cm (11.81inches)) Use twisted pair shielded cable.
from sensor circuit. Sensor
Control Power
supply
power supply Do not earth control for sensor
box directly. Do not earth shield but connect
Do not earth it to signal common cable.
control cable.

1.5.8 Grounding precautions


Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and
motor must be grounded.

Use the dedicated ground terminal to ground the inverter. (Do not use the screw in
the casing, chassis, etc.)
Use a tinned* crimping terminal to connect the earth cable. When tightening the
screw, be careful not to break the threads.
*Plating should not include zinc.

Use the thickest possible ground cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or
greater than that indicated in the following table, and minimize the cable length. 1
The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
(Unit: mm2)
Ground Cable Size
Motor Capacity
200V, 100V class 400V class
2.2kW (3HP) or less 2 (2.5) 2 (2.5)
3.7kW (5HP) 3.5 (4) 2 (4)
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable
whose size is indicated within parentheses.

Ground the motor on the inverter side using one cable of the 4-core cable.

19

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.5.9 Regarding power harmonics
The inverter may generate power harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the
power generator, power capacitor etc. Power harmonics are different from noise and
leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path. Take the following
counter measure suppression techniques.
The following table indicates differences between harmonics and noise:
Item Harmonics Noise
Normally 40th to 50th degrees or High frequency (several 10kHz
Frequency
less (up to 3kHz or less) to MHz order)
To-electric channel, power
Environment To-space, distance, wiring path
impedance
Quantitative Random occurrence, quantitative
Theoretical calculation possible
understanding grasping difficult
Change with current variation
Generated amount Nearly proportional to load
ratio (larger as switching speed
capacity
increases)
Affected equipment Specified in standard per Different depending on maker's
immunity equipment equipment specifications
Suppression example Provide reactor. Increase distance.
Suppression technique Power factor
Harmonic currents produced NFB improving DC reactor
on the power supply side by
Motor
the inverter change with such Inverter
conditions as whether there IM
are wiring impedances and a
power factor improving
reactor and the magnitudes of
Power factor Do not provide power factor
output frequency and output
current on the load side. improving AC reactor improving capacitor.
For the output frequency and output current, we understand that they should be
calculated in the conditions under the rated load at the maximum operating frequency.
CAUTION
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output
side may be overheated or damaged by the harmonic components of the inverter
output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output
side when the motor is driven by the inverter. To improve the power factor, insert a
power factor improving reactor in the inverter's primary side or DC circuit. For full
information, refer to page 18.

1.5.10 Japanese power harmonic suppression guideline


Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power
transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other
consumers from these outgoing harmonics.
1) [Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose
products]
The "harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose
products" issued by ex-Ministry of International Trade and Industry (present Ministry
of Economy, Trade and Industry) in September, 1994 applies to the FR-S500 series
other than the three-phase 400V class. By installing the FR-BEL or FR-BAL power
factor improving reactor, this product complies with the "harmonic suppression
techniques for transistorized inverters (input current 20A or less)" established by the
Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
20

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2) "Harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers"
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a
high-voltage or specially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew
harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this
guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.

Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power
Over
Received Power Voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd
23rd
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70
22 kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
33 kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24

(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific


consumers

New installation/addition/
renewal of equipment

Calculation of equivalent
capacity sum

Not more than


reference capacity
Sum of equivalent
capacities

Over reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing 1
harmonic current

Is outgoing harmonic Over maximum value


current equal to or lower
than maximum value?
Harmonic suppression
technique is required.
Not more than
maximum value
Harmonic suppression
technique is not required.

21

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Table 2 Conversion Factors for FR-S500 Series
Class Circuit Type Conversion Factor (Ki)
Without reactor K31 = 3.4
3-phase bridge
With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
3 (Capacitor-
With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
smoothed)
With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4

Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits


Received Power Voltage Reference Capacity
6.6kV 50 kVA
22/33 kV 300 kVA
66kV or more 2000 kVA

Table 4 Harmonic Contents (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)


Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
Used (AC, DC
28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
sides)

1) Calculation of equivalent capacity (P0) of harmonic generating equipment


The "equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the
capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the
following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in
Table 3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:

P0=Σ (Ki× Pi) [kVA] *Rated capacity: Determined by the


Ki: Conversion factor (refer to Table 2) capacity of the applied motor and
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic found in Table 5. It should be noted
generating equipment* [kVA] that the rated capacity used here is
i: Number indicating the conversion used to calculate a generated
circuit type harmonic amount and is different
from the power supply capacity
required for actual inverter drive.

2) Calculation of outgoing harmonic current


Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converterd from
received power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic
content
• Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor × operation time ratio during
30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.

22

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Table 5 Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Inverter Drive
Rated 6.6kV
Fundamental Wave Current Converted from 6.6kV
Applied Current Equivalent of Rated
(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
Motor [A] Fundamental Capacity
(kW) Wave Current (kVA)
400V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
(mA)
0.4 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
0.75 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
1.5 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
2.2 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
3.7 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092

3) Harmonic suppression technique requirement


If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than; maximum value per 1kW (contract
power) × contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.

4) Harmonic suppression techniques


No. Item Description
Reactor installation Install a reactor (ACL) in the AC side of the inverter or a reactor
1 (ACL, DCL) (DCL) in its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic
currents.
Installation of power When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving
2 factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
capacitor
Transformer multi- Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° as in -
3 phase operation ∆, ∆-∆ combination to provide an effect corresponding to 12
pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
AC filter A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedances
4 at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of absorbing
harmonic currents.
Passive filter This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic 1
(Active filter) current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a
5 difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to
suppress a harmonic current at a detection point, providing a great
effect of absorbing harmonic currents.

23

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.6 How to Use the Control Circuit Terminals
1.6.1 Terminal block layout
In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
Terminal arrangement
of control circuit

PC SE RUN 10 2 5 4

SD SD STF STR RL RM RH
FM Japanese version
A B C <AM> NA, EC version
Terminal screw size: M2
Terminal screw
size: M3

REMARKS
For the cable size, wiring length, etc., refer to the instruction manual (basic).

1.6.2 Wiring instructions


1) Terminals SD, SE and 5 are common to the I/O signals. These common terminals
must not be earthed.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run
them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence
circuit).
3) The input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts are
required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to prevent
a contact fault.
*Information on bar terminals
Introduced products (as of June, 2000): Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
Bar Terminal Model Bar Terminal Model
Terminal Screw Size (With Insulation (Without Insulation Wire Size (mm2)
Sleeve) Sleeve)
Al 0.5-6WH A 0.5-6 0.3 to 0.5
M3 (A, B, C terminals)
Al 0.75-6GY A 0.75-6 0.5 to 0.75
M2
Al 0.5-6WH A 0.5-6 0.3 to 0.5
(Other than the above)
Bar terminal crimping terminal: CRIMPFOX ZA3 (Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.)
CAUTION
When using the bar terminal (without insulation sleeve), use care so that the
twisted wires do not come out.

24

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.6.3 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink NA and Japanese version
logic for the Japanese and NA
version, and to source logic for
the EC version.
To change the control logic, the
connector under the setting dial
must be moved to the other
position.
Change the connector position
EC version
using tweezers, a pair of long-
nose pliers etc.
Change the connector position
before switching power on.

CAUTION
• Make sure that the front cover is installed securely.
• The front cover is fitted with the capacity plate and the inverter unit with the rating
plate. Since these plates have the same serial numbers, always replace the
removed cover onto the original inverter.
• The sink-source logic change-over connector must be fitted in only one of those
positions. If it is fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be
damaged.

25

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1) Sink logic type
In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding
signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the
open collector output signals.
A current flows out of
the corresponding Inverter AX40
Current R signal RUN
STF
RUN 1
R R
STR R

SD SE 9

24VDC

Connecting a positive external power supply AY40 type


transistor
for transistor output to terminal PC prevents output module Inverter
a malfunction caused by a undesirable
current. (Do not connect terminal SD of the 1 24VDC
inverter with terminal 0V of the external STF (SD)

power supply. When using terminals PC-SD 2


STR
as a 24VDC power supply, do not install an
3
external power supply in parallel with the
RH
inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction 4
in the inverter due to a undesirable current.) RM
5
RL

9
PC
10 24VDC
SD

26

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2) Source logic type
In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. For the open collector output
signals, terminal SE is a positive external power supply terminal.
A current flows out of
the corresponding
PC signal RUN Inverter AX80

Current RUN 1
STF R
R
STR R SE

R 24VDC 9

Connecting the 0V terminal of the AY-80 Inverter


external power supply for transistor 9 PC
output to terminal SD prevents a 24VDC
1 STF
malfunction caused by a undesirable (SD)
current. STR
2 24VDC

10 SD

27

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.7 Input Terminals
1.7.1 Run (start) and stop (STF, STR, STOP)
To start and stop the motor, first switch on the input power supply of the inverter
(switch on the magnetic contactor, if any, in the input circuit during preparation for
operation), then start the motor with the forward or reverse rotation start signal.

(1) Two-wire type connection (STF, STR)


A two-wire type connection is shown on NFB
the right. Power
R<L1>,S<N>,T
supply
1) The forward/reverse rotation signal is Inverter
used as both the start and stop Forward
rotation start STF
signals. Switch on either of the Reverse
forward and reverse rotation signals STR (Pr.63= "- - -" )
rotation start
to start the motor in the corresponding SD
direction. Switch on both or switch off
the start signal during operation to
Output frequency

decelerate the inverter to a stop.


2) The frequency setting signal may
either be given by entering 0 to 5VDC
(or 0 to 10VDC) across frequency
setting input terminal 2-5 or by setting
Time
the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6
Across ON
"multi-speed setting" (high, middle, STF-SD
low speeds). (For multi-speed (STR) 2-wire type connection example
operation, refer to page 32.)
3) After the start signal has been input, the inverter starts operating when the
frequency setting signal reaches or exceeds the "starting frequency" set in Pr. 13
(factory-set to 0.5Hz).
If the motor load torque is large or the "torque boost" set in Pr. 0 is small, operation
may not be started due to insufficient torque until the inverter output frequency
reaches about 3 to 6Hz.
If the "minimum frequency" set in Pr. 2 (factory setting = 0Hz) is 6Hz, for example,
merely entering the start signal causes the running frequency to reach the minimum
frequency of 6Hz according to the "acceleration time" set in Pr. 7.
4) To stop the motor, operate the DC injection brake for the period of "DC injection
brake operation time" set in Pr. 11 (factory setting = 0.5s) at not more than the DC
injection brake operation frequency or at not more than 0.5Hz.
To disable the DC injection brake function, set 0 in either of Pr. 11 "DC injection
brake operation time" and Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage".
In this case, the motor is coasted to a stop at not more than the frequency set in
Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency" (0 to 120Hz variable) or at not more
than 0.5Hz (when the DC dynamic brake is not operated).
5) If the reverse rotation signal is input during forward rotation or the forward rotation
signal is input during reverse rotation, the inverter is decelerated and then switched
to the opposite output without going through the stop mode.

28

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) Three-wire type connection (STF, STR, STOP)
A three-wire type connection is shown NFB
on the right. Assign the start self-holding Power R<L1>,S<N>,T
signal (STOP) to any of the input supply Forward
rotation start
Inverter
terminals. To make a reverse rotation Stop
start, set Pr. 63 to "- - -" (factory setting). STF
1) Short the signal STOP-SD to enable
STR (Pr.63= "- - -" )
the start self-holding function. In this Reverse
case, the forward/reverse rotation rotation start
STOP
signal functions only as a start signal.
(Note) Assign the stop signal to any of SD

Output frequency
Pr. 60 to Pr. 62 (input terminal
function selection).
2) If the start signal terminal STF (STR)-
SD are shorted once, then opened, the
start signal is kept on and starts the
inverter. To change the rotation Time
ON
direction, short the start signal STR
(STF)-SD once, then open it. Start
(Note) Assign the stop signal to any of ON
Pr. 60 to Pr. 62 (input terminal Stop
function selection).
3-wire type connection example
3) The inverter is decelerated to a stop by
opening the signal STOP-SD once. For
the frequency setting signal and the
operation of DC dynamic brake at a
stop time, refer to paragraphs 2) to 4) in
(1) Two-wire type connection. The right
diagram shows 3-wire type connection.
4) When the signal JOG-SD is shorted, the STOP signal is invalid and the JOG signal
has precedence.
5) If the output stop signal MRS-SD is shorted, the self-holding function is not
deactivated.
DC Injection Brake and Coasting to Stop functionality
Operation External Operation or Combined PU Operation or Combined
Mode Operation Operation 1
Pr. 79 = "0", "2", "3" Pr. 79 = "0", "1", "4"
Terminals STF
(STR)-SD Set frequency Set frequency
Stop key
DC Injection disconnected changed to 0Hz changed to 0Hz
Brake (*1)
DC injection DC injection
brake operated at brake operated at
not more than DC injection not more than DC injection
DC injection
"DC injection brake operated at "DC injection brake operated at
brake enabled brake operation 0.5Hz or less. brake operation 0.5Hz or less.
frequency" set in frequency" set in
Pr. 10 Pr. 10
Coasted to a stop Coasted to a stop
at not more than at not more than
DC injection "DC injection Coasted to a stop "DC injection Coasted to a stop
brake disabled brake operation at 0.5Hz or less. brake operation at 0.5Hz or less.
frequency" set in frequency" set in
Pr. 10 Pr. 10
STOP
*1: Also stopped by the RESET key. Refer to page 94.

29

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DC injection brake enabled DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake

Output frequency
Starting frequency DC injection brake not operated
Pr.13 operation
(*1) frequency Pr. 10 (*4)
3Hz 0.5Hz 3Hz
0.5Hz 0.5Hz
Coasted to Time
0.5s 0.5s
Start signal DC injection DC injection a stop
brake operation brake operation
terminal time Pr. 11 ON time Pr. 11
Across STF-SD ON (*3) (*3)
ON
Across STR-SD

(*2)

Start/Stop Timing Chart (for two-wire type)


Starting Start signal switched on (*4)
Output frequency

frequency while DC injection brake DC injection brake operation


Pr.13 is being operated frequency Pr. 10
(*1) Forward DC injection
Forward rotation 3Hz
0.5Hz rotation 0.5Hz brake enabled
Time
3Hz
Reverse
Start rotation 0.5s
signal DC injection brake
terminal operation time Pr. 11
ON ON (*3)
Across
STF-SD ON ON
Across
STR-SD
Forward-Reverse Rotation Switch-Over Timing Chart

REMARKS
*1 The "starting frequency" in Pr. 13 (factory-set to 0.5Hz) may be set between 0
and 60Hz.
*2. If the next start signal is given during DC injection brake operation, the DC
injection brake is disabled and restart is made.
*3. The "DC injection brake operation time" in Pr. 11 (factory-set to 0.5s) may be
set between 0 and 10s.
*4. The frequency at which the motor is coasted to a stop is not more than the "DC
injection brake operation frequency" set in Pr. 10 (factory setting = 3Hz; may be
set between 0 and 120Hz) or not more than 0.5Hz.
*5. The "starting frequency" in Pr. 13, "DC injection brake operation time" in Pr. 11
and "DC injection brake operation frequency" in Pr. 10 are the factory-set
values.

30

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.7.2 Connection of frequency setting potentiometer and output
frequency meter (10, 2, 5, 4, AU)
The analog frequency setting input signals that may be entered are voltage and
current signals.
For the relationships between the frequency setting input voltages (currents) and
output frequencies, refer to the following diagram. The frequency setting input signals
are proportional to the output frequencies. Note that when the input signal is less than
the starting frequency, the output frequency of the inverter is 0Hz.
If the input signal of 5VDC (or 10V, 20mA) or higher is entered, the output frequency
does not exceed the maximum output frequency.
Frequency setting
voltage gain frequency
Frequency setting
Output frequencies (Hz)

current gain frequency


(1 to 120Hz)
Maximum frequency
Input voltage is
(0 to 120Hz) proportional to
output Pr.38
Minimum frequency frequency.
(0 to 120Hz) Pr.1 Pr.39

Starting frequency
(0 to 60Hz) Pr.2
0.5 Pr.13
0 5V Pr.73
Frequency setting signal
(10V)
(20mA)
Relationships between Frequency Setting Inputs and Output Frequencies

REMARKS
For the way to calibrate the output frequency meter, refer to the instruction manual
(basic). 1
(1) Voltage input (10, 2, 5)
Enter the frequency setting input signal of 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10VDC) across the
frequency setting input terminals 2-5. The maximum output frequency is reached
when 5V (10V) is input across terminals 2-5.
The power supply used may either be the inverter's built-in power supply or an
external power supply. For the built-in power supply, terminals 10-5 provide 5VDC
output.
For operation at 0 to 5VDC, set "0" in For operation at 0 to 10VDC, set "1" in
Pr. 73 to the 0 to 5VDC input. Use Pr. 73 to the 0 to 10VDC input.
terminal 10 for the built-in power
supply.

+5V 10
2 2
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
5 5

31

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) Current input (4, 5, AU)
To automatically perform operation under constant pressure or temperature control
using a fan, pump etc., enter the controller output signal of 4 to 20mADC across
terminals 4-5.
Terminals AU-SD must be shorted to use the 4 to 20mADC signal for operation.
(Assign the signal AU using any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63.)
When the multi-speed signal is input, the current input is ignored.
Automatic/manual
signal switching Across
AU-SD ON OFF
AU
SD Manual
Manual operation operation
10 Operation Automatic 0 to 5V
Frequency setting 2 operation
potentiometer 5 Inverter 4 to 20mA (0 to 10V)
Automatic signal
DC4-20mA 4
Manual-Automatic Switching

1.7.3 External frequency selection (REX, RH, RM, RL)


Up to 15 speeds (*) may be selected for an external command forward rotation start or
up to 7 speeds for an external command reverse rotation start according to the
combination of connecting the multi-speed select terminals REX, RH, RM and RL-SD,
and multi-speed operation can be performed as shown below by shorting the start
signal terminal STF (STR)-SD.
Speeds (frequencies) may be specified as desired from the operation panel or
parameter unit as listed below.
CAUTION
•* Change the setting of Pr. 63 "STR terminal function selection" to "8", and assign
and use the 15-speed select signal (REX).
• Has precedence over the main speed setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA
DC).
Output frequency (Hz)

Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(high speed) Speed 10


Speed 5 Speed 11
Speed 2 Speed 12
Speed 6 Speed 9
(middle speed)
Speed 3 Speed 4 Speed 13
Speed 8 Speed 14
(low speed)
Speed 7 Speed 15

Time Time

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RH RH
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
REX REX

32

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Multi-Speed Setting
Terminal Input
Set Frequency
Speed REX- RH- RM- RL- Parameter Remarks
Range
SD* SD SD SD
Speed 1
(high OFF ON OFF OFF Pr. 4 0 to 120Hz ———————
speed)
Speed 2
(middle OFF OFF ON OFF Pr. 5 0 to 120Hz ———————
speed)
Speed 3
(low OFF OFF OFF ON Pr. 6 0 to 120Hz ———————
speed)
Speed 4 OFF OFF ON ON Pr. 24 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 24="- - -"
Speed 5 OFF ON OFF ON Pr. 25 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 25="- - -"
Speed 6 OFF ON ON OFF Pr. 26 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 5 setting when Pr. 26="- - -"
Speed 7 OFF ON ON ON Pr. 27 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 27="- - -"
Speed 8 ON OFF OFF OFF Pr. 80 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0Hz when Pr. 80="- - -"
Speed 9 ON OFF OFF ON Pr. 81 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 81="- - -"
Speed 10 ON OFF ON OFF Pr. 82 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 5 setting when Pr. 82="- - -"
Speed 11 ON OFF ON ON Pr. 83 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 83="- - -"
Speed 12 ON ON OFF OFF Pr. 84 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 4 setting when Pr. 84="- - -"
Speed 13 ON ON OFF ON Pr. 85 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 85="- - -"
Speed 14 ON ON ON OFF Pr. 86 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 5 setting when Pr. 86="- - -"
Speed 15 ON ON ON ON Pr. 87 0 to 120Hz, - - - Pr. 6 setting when Pr. 87="- - -"
Frequency
External
OFF OFF OFF OFF setting 0 to max. setting ———————
setting
potentiometer
*When using the REX signal, a reverse rotation start cannot be made by the
external command.
Motor
R<L1> U 1
Power supply S<N> V IM
T W
Inverter
Forward rotation STF
*2
REX 10
*1
RH 2 Frequency
Multi-speed
RM setting
selection 5
RL potentiometer
SD
Multi-Speed Operation Connection Example
REMARKS
*1: When the frequency setting potentiometer is connected, the input signal of the
frequency setting potentiometer is ignored if the multi-speed select signal is
switched on. (This also applies to the 4 to 20mA input signal.)
*2: For a reverse rotation start, set Pr. 63 to "- - -" (factory setting).
33

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.7.4 Indicator connection and adjustment
(1) Japanese version (FM)
The output frequency, etc. of the inverter can be indicated by a DC ammeter of 1mA
full-scale deflection and maximum 300Ω internal resistance or a commercially
available digital indicator which is connected across terminals FM-SD.
The indicator can be calibrated from the operation panel or parameter unit. Note that
the reading varies according to the wiring distance if the indicator is placed away from
the inverter. In this case, connect a calibration resistor in series with the indicator as
shown below and adjust until the reading matches the operation panel or parameter
unit indication (indicator monitoring mode).
Install the indicator within 200m (656.16feet) (50m (164.04feet) for the digital
indicator) of the inverter and connect them by at least 0.3mm2 twisted or shielded
cables.
Calibration resistor*
Inverter Inverter 1440 pulses/s
FM (+) FM
1mA
Analog
indicator
SD (-) SD Digital indicator
(1mA full-scale)
Types of Indicators Connected
REMARKS
* Not needed when calibration is made using the calibration parameter C1 "FM
terminal calibration". This resistor is used when calibration must be made near the
frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter. Note that the
needle of the frequency meter may not deflect to full-scale when the calibration
resistor is connected. In this case, use both the resistor and calibration parameter
"C1".

CAUTION
• Refer to page 111 for the procedure of indicator adjustment.

34

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Output waveform of terminal FM
The output signal of terminal FM has a pulse waveform as shown in the table below
and the number of its pulses is proportional to the inverter output frequency.
The output voltage (average voltage) is also proportional to the output frequency.

Terminal FM Output Voltage


Specifications Inverter
Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 900)
24V
Output
waveform 8V

Max. 2400 pulses/s FM


Number Set a full-scale value which SD
of output achieves 1440 pulses/s.
pulses Pr. 55: frequency monitoring
FM
(pulses/ reference
second) Pr. 56: current monitoring Example of Inverter and Frequency
reference Meter
Output 0 to 8VDC max. (*1)
voltage (Approx. 5V at 1440 pulses/s)
*1. 0.5V or less when a DC ammeter of 300Ω or less internal resistance is connected
to measure the output voltage.

Adjustment
Analog meter
To adjust the reading of an analog indicator (ammeter), turn the calibration resistor
to change the current.
1
When using the operation panel or parameter unit for adjustment, change the pulse
width of the output waveform (calibration parameter "C1") (adjust the current through
the adjustment of the output voltage) to adjust the reading. (For details, refer to page
111.)

REMARKS
It is not recommended to use a voltage type indicator because it is easily affected
by a voltage drop, induction noise, etc. and may not provide correct reading if the
wiring distance is long.

35

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Digital indicator
Since the digital indicator counts and displays the number of pulses, adjust it from
the operation panel or parameter unit.
The inverter output, at which the reference pulses of 1440 pulses/s are output, can
be set in Pr. 55 when frequency monitoring is used as reference, or in Pr. 56 when
current monitoring is used as reference.
[Example] 1. To set the output across FM-SD to 1440 pulses/s at the inverter output
frequency of 120Hz, set "120" (Hz) in Pr. 55. (Factory setting: 60Hz)
2. To set the output across FM-SD to 1440 pulses/s at the inverter output
current of 15A, set "15" (A) in Pr. 56. (Factory setting: rated inverter
current)
(2) NA and EC version (AM)
A full-scale 5VDC analog signal can be Meter
output from across terminals AM-5. 5V full scale
The analog output level can be calibrated Analog meter
by the operation panel or parameter unit 1mA
(FR-PU04). Terminal AM function AM
selection can be set in Pr. 54 "AM terminal
function selection".
5
Terminal AM is isolated from the control
circuit of the inverter. The cable length
should not exceed 30m (98.44feet).
The output signal from terminal AM Inverter
delays about several 100ms in output
and therefore cannot be used as a
signal for control which requires fast
response.
AM AM
CPU
circuit
5VDC
5

Terminal AM Output Circuit

Adjustment
Set the reference output value of the inverter which outputs the full-scale voltage
5VDC.
Set it in Pr. 55 for frequency monitoring reference, or in Pr. 56 for current monitoring
reference.
Use the terminal AM output calibration parameter C1 to adjust the output voltage.
[Example] 1. To set the output across AM-5 to 5VDC at the inverter output frequency
of 90Hz, set 90Hz in Pr. 55. (Factory setting: 50Hz)
2. To set the output across AM-5 to 5VDC at the inverter output current of
20A, set 20A in Pr. 56. (Factory setting: rated inverter current)

CAUTION
• Refer to page 113 for the procedure of indicator adjustment.

36

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.7.5 Control circuit common terminals (SD, 5, SE)
Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are
isolated from each other.
Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, RH, RM,
RL) and frequency output signal (FM).
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting analog input signals and
indicator terminal "AM". It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or
twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN).

REMARKS
Terminal FM is provided for the FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K (-R) (-C), FR-S520S-0.1K to
1.5K (-R) and FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75 (-R), and terminal AM is provided for the
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K-NA, FR-S520S-0.2K to 1.5K-EC (R) and FR-S510W-0.1K to
0.75K-NA.

1.7.6 Signal inputs by contactless switches


If a transistor is used instead of a +24V
contacted switch as shown on the right,
the input signals of the inverter can
control terminals STF, STR, RH, RM,
RL. STF, etc.

1
Inverter

SD

External signal input using transistor

REMARKS
1. When using an external transistor connected with the external power supply, use
terminal PC to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to a leakage current.
(Refer to page 25.)
2. Note that an SSR (solid-state relay) has a relatively large leakage current at OFF
time and it may be accidentally input to the inverter.

37

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.8 How to Use the Input Signals (Assigned Terminals
RL, RM, RH, STR)
These terminals can be Pr. 60 "RL terminal function selection"
changed in function by setting Pr. 61 "RM terminal function selection" Page 88
Pr. 60 to Pr. 63. Pr. 62 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 63 "STR terminal function selection"
1.8.1 Multi-speed setting (RL, RM, RH, REX signals): Setting "0, 1, 2, 8"
Remote setting (RL, RM, RH signals): Setting "0, 1, 2"
By entering frequency commands into the RL, RM, RH and REX signals and turning
on/off the corresponding signals, you can perform multi-speed operation (15
speeds). (For details, refer to page 32.)
If the operation panel is away from the control box, you can perform continuous
variable-speed operation with signal contacts, without using analog signals. (For
details, refer to page 86.)
1.8.2 Second function selection (RT signal): Setting "3"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time" Inverter
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Pr. 46 "second torque boost" Start STF (STR)
Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency)" Second acceleration RT
To set any of the above functions, turn on this /deceleration
SD
"RT signal".
1.8.3 Current input selection "AU signal": Setting "4"
When a fan, pump etc. is
Automatic/manual Across
used to perform operation of
constant- pressure/ signal switching AU-SD ON OFF
AU Manual
temperature control,
SD operation
automatic operation can be Manual operation Automatic
10 Operation operation 0 to 5V
performed by entering the 4- Frequency setting 2
20mADC output signal of a potentiometer 5 Inverter 4 to 20mA (0 to 10V)
Automatic signal
regulator into across DC4-20mA 4
terminals 4-5.
When the 4-20mADC signal is used to perform operation, always short the AU signal.
REMARKS
The current input is ignored if the multi-speed signal is input.
1.8.4 Start self-holding selection (STOP signal): Setting "5"
This connection example is used when *
STOP
you want to self-hold the start signal
(forward rotation, reverse rotation). Stop
* Connected to the STOP signal to
avoid forward or reverse rotation if SD
Forward
forward or reverse rotation and stop rotation
STF
Reverse
are turned on simultaneously. rotation STR

(Wiring example for sink logic)


38

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.8.5 Output shut-off (MRS signal): Setting "6"
Short the output stop terminal MRS-SD during inverter output to cause the inverter to
immediately stop the output. Open terminals MRS-SD to resume operation in about
10ms. Terminal MRS may be used as described below:

(1) To stop the motor by Motor coasted

Output frequency
mechanical brake (e.g. to stop
electromagnetic brake)
Terminals MRS-SD must be shorted
when the mechanical brake is
operated and be opened before motor 0.5Hz
Pr. 13
restart. "starting
(2) To provide interlock to disable frequency"
operation by the inverter Across
ON
After MRS-SD have been shorted, the MRS -SD
inverter cannot be operated if the start Across ON
STF-SD
signal is given to the inverter. (STR)
(3) To coast the motor to stop
The motor is decelerated according to the preset deceleration time and is
stopped by operating the DC injection brake at 3Hz or less. By using terminal
MRS, the motor is coasted to a stop.

1.8.6 External thermal relay input: Setting "7"


When the external thermal relay or thermal relay built Thermal relay
Inverter Motor
in the motor is actuated, the inverter output is shut U
off and an alarm signal is given to keep the motor V IM
W 1
stopped to protect the motor from overheat. If the OH
thermal relay contact is reset, the motor is not SD
restarted unless the reset terminal RES-SD is
shorted for more than 0.1s and then opened or
power-on reset is performed.
The function may therefore be used as an external
emergency stop signal input.

39

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.8.7 Jog operation (JOG signal): Setting "9"
(1) Jog operation using external signals
Jog operation can be Jog frequency Pr. 15

Output frequency
started/stopped by shorting the
jog mode select terminal JOG- Forward 3Hz
DC injection brake
0.5Hz
SD and shorting/opening the rotation
start signal terminal STF or Time
Reverse
STR-SD. The jog frequency and rotation
jog acceleration/deceleration
time are set in Pr. 15 (factory ON
setting 5Hz, variable between 0 Across JOG-SD
and 120Hz) and Pr. 16 (factory Forward rotation ON
Across STF-SD
setting 0.5s, variable between 0 Reverse rotation ON
and 999s), respectively, Across STR-SD
and their settings can be changed from the operation panel or parameter unit (type with
RS-485 communication function).
The JOG signal has precedence over the multi-speed signal. (External)
1.8.8 Reset signal: Setting "10"
Used to reset the alarm stop state established when the inverter's protective function is
activated. The reset signal immediately sets the control circuit to the initial (cold) status,
e.g. initializes the electronic overcurrent protection circuit. It shuts off the inverter output
at the same time. During reset, the inverter output is kept shut off. To give this reset
input, short terminals RES-SD for more than 0.1 second. When the shorting time is long,
the operation panel or parameter unit displays the initial screen, which is not a fault.
Operation is enabled after terminals RES-SD are opened.
The reset terminal is used to reset the inverter alarm stop state. If the reset terminal is
shorted, then opened while the inverter is running, the motor may be restarted during
coasting (refer to the timing chart below) and the output may be shut off due to
overcurrent or overvoltage.
Setting either of "1" and "15" in reset selection Pr. 75 allows the accidental input of the
reset signal during operation to be unaccepted.
(For details, refer to page 94.)
When motor is restarted
during coasting, inverter
activates current limit to Coasting to stop
start acceleration. (Indicates motor speed)
Output frequency

Ordinary
acceleration
Coasting
(Hz)

Coasting time
ON ON
Across RES-SD
ON
Across
STF (STR)-SD T
T: Should be longer than the time of
coasting to stop.
CAUTION
Frequent resetting will make electronic overcurrent protection invalid.
40

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.8.9 PID control valid terminal: Setting "14"
To exercise PID control, turn on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, ordinary
inverter operation is performed. For more information, refer to page 101.
♦Related parameters♦

Pr. 88 "PID action selection", Pr. 89 "PID proportional band", Pr. 90 "PID integral time", Pr. 91
"PID upper limit", Pr. 92 "PID lower limit", Pr. 93 "PID control set point for PU operation", Pr. 94
"PID differential time" (Refer to page 101)

1.8.10 PU operation/external operation switching: Setting "16"


You can change the operation mode.
With "8" set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", turning on the X16 signal shifts the
operation mode to the external operation mode and turning off the X16 signal shifts it
to the PU operation mode. For details, refer to page 98.

♦Related parameters♦

Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (Refer to page 98)

1.9 Handling of the RS-485 Connector (Type with RS-485


Communication Function)
<RS-485 connector pin layout>
View A of the inverter (receptacle side) View A
1) SG 5) SDA
2) P5S 6) RDB
3) RDA 7) SG
8) to 1) 4) SDB 8) P5S

View A 1
CAUTION
1. Do not plug the connector to a computer LAN board, fax modem socket,
telephone modular connector etc. as they are different in electrical specifications,
the inverter may be damaged.
2. Pins 2 and 8 (P5S) are provided for the parameter unit power supply. Do not use
them for any other purpose or when making parallel connection by RS-485
communication.

(1) When connecting the parameter unit


Use the optional FR-CB2 .

41

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) RS-485 communication
Use the RS-485 connector to perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc.
By connecting the RS-485 connector to a computer such as a personal computer,
Factory Automation unit (HMI etc.) or other computer, by the communication
cable, you can operate/monitor the inverter and read/write the parameter values
using user programs. For parameter setting, refer to page 116.

Conforming standard: EIA Standard RS-485


Transmission format: Multidrop link system
Communication speed: Max. 19200bps
Overall extension: 500m (1640.42feet)

<System configuration examples>


1) When a computer having a RS-485 interface is used with several inverters
Computer Station 1 Station 2 Station n (Max. 32 inverters)
Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
RS-485 connector connector connector
interface (*1) (*1) (*1)
/terminal Distribution
terminal
Termination
10BASE-T cable (*2) resistor
Use the connectors and cables which are available on the market.
Introduced products (as of June, 2000)
*1. Connector :RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
*2. Cable :Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
(Do not use pins No. 2 and 8 (P5S)).

2) When a computer having a RS-232C interface is used with inverters


Computer Station 1 Station 2 Station n
Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-232C
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
connector connector connector connector
Max. 15m
RS-232C (*1) (*1) (*1)
cable
Distribution
Converter* terminal
RS-485 Termination
terminal 10BASE-T cable (*2) resistor
Commercially available converter is required. (*3)

42

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Use the connectors, cables and converter which are available on the market.
Introduced products (as of June, 2000)
*1. Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
*2. Cable : Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
(Do not use pins No. 2 and 8 (P5S)).
*3. Commercially available converter examples
Model: FA-T-RS40 Converter (One with connector and cable is also available)
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
<Wiring methods>
1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Computer Side Terminals
Signal Cable connection and signal direction Inverter
Description RS-485 connector
name 10 BASE-T Cable
RDA Receive data SDA
RDB Receive data SDB
SDA Send data RDA
SDB Send data RDB
RSA Request to send
RSB Request to send
(*1)
CSA Clear to send
CSB Clear to send 0.3mm2 or more
SG Signal ground SG
FG Frame ground
2) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
Cable connection and signal direction
Computer 10 BASE-T Cable
RDA
RDB 1
SDA
SDB Termination
RSA resistor
RDB
RDA

RDB
RDA

RDB
RDA

RSB
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA

SDB
SDA

(*1) (*2)
CSA
CSB
SG SG SG SG
FG Station 1 Station 2 Station n
Inverter Inverter Inverter
REMARKS
*1. Make connection in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer to be
used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they change with
the model.
*2. The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or
transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a termination
resistor. When the RS-485 connector is used for connection, a termination resistor
cannot be fitted, so use a distributor. Connect the termination resistor to only the
inverter remotest from the computer. (Termination resistor: 100Ω)
43

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


1.10 Design Information
1) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 which are used for
commercial power supply-inverter switch-over.
When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown
below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due
to arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence
error.
2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure,
provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a
sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will
automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
3) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two or more
parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a
contact fault.
4) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control
circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp
etc.
6) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.

1) Commercial power supply-inverter 3) Low-level signal contacts


switch-over
MC1
Interlock
Power R<L1> U
supply IM
S<N> V MC2
T W Leakage current
Inverter Low-level signal contacts Twin contact

44

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2. FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "functions" for use of this product. For
simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the factory settings
of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary
parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Refer
to the instruction manual (basic) for the operation procedures.
Always read the instructions before using the functions.
2.1 Function (Parameter) List ........................................................46
2.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use ....................56
2.3 Explanation of Functions (Parameters) ...................................58
2.4 Output Terminal Function Parameters ....................................78
2.5 Current Detection Function Parameters ..................................80
2.6 Display Function Parameters ..................................................82
2.7 Restart Operation Parameters ................................................84
2.8 Additional Function Parameters ..............................................86
2.9 Terminal Function Selection Parameters ................................88
2.10 Operation Selection Function Parameters ............................91
2.11 Auxiliary Function Parameters ............................................109
2.12 Calibration Parameters........................................................111
2.13 Clear Parameters ................................................................115
2.14 Communication Parameters (Only for the Type
Having the RS-485 Communication Function)....................116
2.15 Parameter Unit (FR-PU04) Setting......................................133
CAUTION
As the contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, STR, open collector Chapter 1
output terminal RUN and contact output terminals A, B, C can be
changed in functions by parameter setting, their signal names
used for the corresponding functions are used in this chapter
(with the exception of the wiring examples). Note that they are not
terminal names.
Chapter22
REMARKS
Parameter copy
Use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04) with the type having the
RS-485 communication function allows the parameter values to
be copied to another inverter (only the FR-S500 series). Chapter 3
After batch-reading the parameters of the copy source inverter,
you can connect the parameter unit to the copy destination
inverter and batch-write the parameters.
For the operation procedure, refer to the instruction manual of the
parameter unit (FR-PU04).
Chapter 4

45

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.1 Function (Parameter) List
Factory
Minimum Cus-
Indica- Setting Setting Refer
Parameter Name Setting tomer
Pammeter List

tion Range <EC To:


Increments Setting
version>
6%/5%/
0 Torque boost 0 to 15% 0.1% 4% 58
(Note 1)
60Hz
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz <50Hz> 59
2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 0Hz 59
60Hz
3 Base frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz <50Hz> 59
Multi-speed setting 60Hz
4* (high speed) 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz <50Hz> 61
Multi-speed setting
5* 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 30Hz 61
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
6* 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 10Hz 61
(low speed)
7 Acceleration time 0 to 999s 0.1s 5s 62
8 Deceleration time 0 to 999s 0.1s 5s 62
Rated
Electronic thermal O/L
9 0 to 50A 0.1A output 64
relay current
Extended function
30 * display selection 0, 1 1 0 72
Operation mode
79 selection 0 to 4, 7, 8 1 0 98
Note 1: The factory setting varies with the inverter capacity: 5% for FR-S540-1.5K and
2.2K, 4% for FR-S540-3.7K.
The extended function parameters are made valid by setting "1" in Pr. 30 "extended
function display selection". (For full information on the way to set Pr. 30, refer to the
instruction manual (basic).)
Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Factory Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion Setting To:
ter Increments Setting
DC injection
brake
10 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 3Hz 64
operation
frequency
Standard operation functions

DC injection
11 brake 0 to 10s 0.1s 0.5s 64
operation time
DC injection
12 brake voltage 0 to 15% 0.1% 6% 64
Starting
13 frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.1Hz 0.5Hz 65
0: For constant-torque
loads,
Load pattern 1: For variable-torque
14 1 0 66
selection loads,
2: For vertical lift loads,
3: For vertical lift loads

46

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Factory
Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion <EC To:
ter Increments Setting
version>
15 Jog frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 5Hz 67

Pammeter List
Jog
acceleration/
16 0 to 999s 0.1s 0.5s 67
deceleration
time
RUN key
rotation 0: Forward rotation,
17 1 0 67
direction 1: Reverse rotation
selection
0 to 500V, 888, - - -
Base frequency ---
19 (0 to 800V, 888, - - - 1V 59
voltage <888>
for the 400V class.)
Acceleration/
deceleration 60Hz
20 1 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 62
reference <50Hz>
frequency
Stall
prevention
21 0 to 31, 100 1 0 68
function
Standard operation functions

selection
Stall
22 * prevention 0 to 200% 1% 150% 69
operation level
Stall
prevention
operation level
23 0 to 200%, - - - 1% --- 69
compensation
factor at
double speed
Multi-speed
24 * setting 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
(speed 4)
Multi-speed
25 * setting 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
(speed 5)
Multi-speed
26 * setting 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61 2
(speed 6)
Multi-speed
27 * setting 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
(speed 7)
Stall
prevention
operation 60Hz
28 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 69
reduction <50Hz>
starting
frequency

47

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Pa- Minimum Factory Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion <EC To:
ter Increments version> Setting
0: Linear acceleration/
deceleration,
Pammeter List

Acceleration/
1: S-pattern acceleration/
29 deceleration 1 0 71
deceleration A,
pattern
2: S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration B
Frequency
31 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 1A
Frequency
32 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 1B
Standard operation functions

Frequency
33 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 2A
Frequency
34 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 2B
Frequency
35 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 3A
Frequency
36 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 72
jump 3B
37 Speed display 0, 0.1 to 999 0.1 0 73
Frequency
60Hz
38 setting voltage 1 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 74
<50Hz>
gain frequency
Frequency
60Hz
39 setting current 1 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 74
<50Hz>
gain frequency
Start-time
ground fault 0: Not detected 0
40 1 78
detection 1: Detected <1>
selection
Up-to-
Output terminal functions

41 frequency 0 to 100% 1% 10% 78


sensitivity
Output
42 frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 6Hz 79
detection
Output
frequency
43 detection for 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 79
reverse
rotation
Second
acceleration/
44 0 to 999s 0.1s 5s 62
deceleration
Second functions

time
Second
45 deceleration 0 to 999s, - - - 0.1s --- 62
time
Second torque
46 0 to 15%, - - - 0.1% --- 58
boost
Second V/F
47 (base 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 59
frequency)

48

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Factory
Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion <EC To:
ter Increments Setting
version>
Output current
48 0 to 200% 1% 150% 80

Pammeter List
detection level
Current detection

Output current
detection
49 0 to 10s 0.1s 0s 80
signal delay
time
Zero current
50 0 to 200% 1% 5% 81
detection level
Zero current
51 0.05 to 1s 0.01s 0.5s 81
detection time

0: Output frequency,
1: Output current,
Control panel
100: Set frequency
52 * display data 1 0 82
during stop/output
selection
frequency during
operation

0: Setting dial
Display functions

Frequency
frequency setting
setting
53 * mode 1 0 83
operation
1: Setting dial
selection
potentiometer mode
FM (AM) 0: Output frequency
terminal monitor
54 * 1 0 82
function 1: Output current
selection monitor
Frequency
60Hz
55 * monitoring 0 to 120Hz 0.1Hz 84
<50Hz>
reference
Current Rated
56 * monitoring 0 to 50A 0.1A output 84
reference current
Automatic restart

Restart
57 0 to 5s, - - - 0.1s --- 84
functions

coasting time

Restart
58 0 to 60s 0.1s 1s 84
cushion time 2
0: Without remote
setting function
1: With remote setting
Additional function

function
Remote With frequency
setting setting storage
59 1 0 86
function function
selection 2: With remote setting
function
Without frequency
setting storage
function

49

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Factory Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion Setting To:
ter Increments Setting
RL terminal
60 function 0: RL, 1: RM, 2: RH, 1 0 88
Pammeter List

selection 3: RT, 4: AU, 5: STOP,


RM terminal 6: MRS, 7: OH,
61 function 8: REX, 9: JOG, 1 1 88
selection
10: RES, 14: X14,
RH terminal
62 function 16: X16, 1 2 88
selection - - -: STR (May be
STR terminal assigned to the STR
63 function terminal only) 1 --- 88
selection
RUN terminal
64 function 0: RUN, 1: SU, 3: OL, 1 0 90
selection 4: FU, 11: RY, 12: Y12,
A, B, C 13: Y13, 14: FDN,
terminal 15: FUP, 16: RL,
65 1 99 90
function 98: LF, 99: ABC
selection
0: OC1 to 3, OV1 to 3,
Terminal function selection

THM, THT, GF,


OHT, OLT, PE, OPT
66 Retry selection 1 0 91
1: OC1 to 3,
2: OV1 to 3,
3: OC1 to 3, OV1 to 3
0: No retry
1 to 10:
Number of Without alarm output
67 retries at alarm during retry operation 1 0 91
occurrence 101 to 110:
With alarm output
during retry operation
Retry waiting
68 0.1 to 360s 0.1s 1s 91
time
Retry count 0: Cumulative count
69 1 0 91
display erase erase
Soft-PWM 0: Soft-PWM invalid,
70 * 1 1 92
setting 1: Soft-PWM valid
0: Thermal characteristic
for standard motor
71 Applied motor 1: Thermal characteristic 1 0 93
for Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor
PWM
72 * frequency 0 to 15 1 1 92
selection
0-5V/0-10V 0: For 0 to 5VDC input
73 1 0 93
selection 1: For 0 to 10VDC input

50

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Factory Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion Setting To:
ter Increments Setting
0: 2-step moving
average processing

Pammeter List
Input filter time 1 to 8:
74 1 1 94
constant Exponential average
value of 2n at the
setting of n
0: Reset normally
enabled/PU stop
key disabled
1: Enabled at alarm
occurrence only/PU
Reset stop key disabled
75 * selection/PU 14: Reset normally 1 14 94
stop selection enabled/normally
Operation selection functions

decelerated to stop
15: Enabled at alarm
occurrence
only/normally
decelerated to stop
0: Operation started at
Cooling fan
power-on
76 operation 1 1 96
1: Cooling fan ON/OFF
selection
control
0: Write is enabled only
during a stop
Parameter 1: Write disabled
77 * write disable (except some 1 0 97
selection parameters)
2: Write during
operation enabled
0: Both forward rotation
and reverse rotation
Reverse
enabled,
rotation
78 1: Reverse rotation 1 0 98
prevention
disabled,
selection
2: Forward rotation
disabled
Multi-speed 2
Multi-speed operation function

80 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61


8)
Multi-speed
81 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
9)
Multi-speed
82 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
10)
Multi-speed
83 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
11)

51

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Pa- Minimum Cus-
Func- Indica- Factory Refer
rame- Name Setting Range Setting tomer
tion tion Setting To:
ter Increments Setting
Multi-speed
Multi-speed operation function

84 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61


Pammeter List

12)
Multi-speed
85 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
13)
Multi-speed
86 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
14)
Multi-speed
87 * setting (speed 0 to 120Hz, - - - 0.1Hz --- 61
15)
PID action 20: PID reverse action,
88 1 20 101
selection 21: PID forward action
PID
89 * proportional 0.1 to 999%, - - - 0.1% 100% 101
band
PID control

PID integral
90 * 0.1 to 999s, - - - 0.1s 1s 101
time
91 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, - - - 0.1% --- 101
92 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, - - - 0.1% --- 101
PID action set
93 * point for PU 0 to 100% 0.01% 0% 101
operation
PID differential
94 * 0.01 to 10s, - - - 0.01s --- 101
time
Rated motor
95 0 to 50%, - - - 0.01% --- 109
slip
Slip compensation

Slip
96 compensation 0.01 to 10s 0.01s 0.5s 109
time constant
Constant-
output region
97 slip 0, - - - 1 --- 109
compensation
selection
Automatic
Automatic torque

torque boost 0.1 to 3.7kW, - - -


98 selection (0.2 to 3.7kW, - - - for 0.01kW --- 109
boost

(Motor the 400V class.)


capacity)
Motor primary
99 0 to 50Ω, - - - 0.01Ω --- 111
resistance

52

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Calibra- Minimum
Cus-
Func- tion Indica- Setting Factory Refer
Name Setting Range tomer
tion parame- tion Incre- Setting To:
Setting
ters ments
<Japa-
FM terminal
nese>

Pammeter List
calibration
900
C1    111
<NA,
AM terminal
EC>
calibration
901
Frequency setting
Calibration parameters

C2 (902) voltage bias 0 to 60Hz 0.1Hz 0Hz 74


frequency
Frequency setting 0%
C3 (902) 0 to 300% 0.1% 74
voltage bias (Note 2)
Frequency setting 96%
C4 (903) 0 to 300% 0.1% 74
voltage gain (Note 2)
Frequency setting
C5 (904) current bias 0 to 60Hz 0.1Hz 0Hz 74
frequency
Frequency setting 20%
C6 (904) 0 to 300% 0.1% 74
current bias (Note 2)
Frequency setting 100%
C7 (905) 0 to 300% 0.1% 74
current gain (Note 2)
C8 (269) Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.
Clear parameters

0: Not executed
CLr Parameter clear 1: parameter clear 1 0 115
2: all clear
0: Not cleared,
Alarm history
ECL * 1: Alarm history 1 0 115
clear
clear
Note 2: Settings may differ because of calibration parameters.
Parameters only for the type having the RS-485 communication function (When the
parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, operation from the operation panel is not
accepted.)
Com-
Minimum
muni- Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Factory Refer
cation Name Setting Range tomer
tion tion Incre- Setting To:
Parame- Setting
ments
ter
0 to 31:
Communication Specify the 2
n1 (331) 1 0 118
Communication Parameters

station number station number


of the inverter.
48: 4800bps,
Communication
n2 (332) 96: 9600bps, 1 192 118
speed
192: 19200bps
0, 1: (Data length 8),
n3 (333) Stop bit length 10, 11: (Data 1 1 118
length 7)
0: Absent,
Parity check 1: With odd parity
n4 (334) presence/ check, 1 2 118
absence 2: With even
parity check

53

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Com-
Minimum Factory
muni- Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Setting Refer
cation Name Setting Range tomer
tion tion Incre- <NA, EC To:
Parame- Setting
ments version>
ter
Pammeter List

Number of
n5 (335) communication 0 to 10, - - - 1 1 118
retries
Communication
0s
n6 (336) check time 0 to 999s, - - - 0.1s 118
<- - ->
interval
n7 (337) Wait time setting 0 to 150ms, - - - 1 --- 118
0: Command write
from computer,
Operation
n8 (338) 1: Command write 1 0 130
command write
from external
terminal
0: Command write
from computer,
Speed command
n9 (339) 1: Command write 1 0 130
write
from external
terminal
Communication Parameters

0: As set in Pr. 79.


n10 Link start mode 1: Started in
1 0 131
(340) selection computer link
operation mode.
0: Without CR/LF,
n11 1: With CR,
CR/LF selection 1 1 118
(341) without LF
2: With CR/LF
0: Write to RAM
n12 E2PROM write and E2PROM
1 0 132
(342) selection 1: Write to RAM
only
0: Japanese,
1: English,
2: German,
n13 PU display 3: French, 0
1 133
(145) language 4: Spanish, <1>
5: Italian,
6: Swedish,
7: Finish
0: Without
n14 PU buzzer
sound, 1 1 133
(990) * sound control
1: With sound
0 (bright)
n15 PU contrast
1 58 134
(991) * adjustment
63 (dark)

54

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Com-
Minimum
muni- Cus-
Func- Indica- Setting Factory Refer
cation Name Setting Range tomer
tion tion Incre- Setting To:
Parame- Setting
ments
ter

Pammeter List
0: Selectable
between
output
frequency
and output
current
100: (during stop):
PU main display Set
n16
screen data frequency, 1 0 134
Communication Parameters

(992) *
selection output
current
(during
operation):
Output
frequency,
output
current
0: Without PU
disconnection
error,
PU 1: Error at PU
n17 disconnection disconnection,
1 0 135
(993) detection/PU 10: Without PU
setting lock disconnection
error (PU
operation
disable)
For details of the program, refer to page 118 onwards.

REMARKS
1. The parameter numbers within parentheses are those for use of the parameter
unit (FR-PU04).
2. Set "9999" when setting a value "- - -" using the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
3. The decimal places of a value 100 or more (3 digits or more) cannot be
displayed.
2
4. The parameters marked * can be changed in setting during operation if "0"
(factory setting) is set in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection". (Note that
Pr. 53, Pr. 70 and Pr. 72 may be changed only during PU operation.)

55

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates
purpose of use and corresponding parameters.

Parameter Numbers
Purpose of Use
Parameter numbers which must be set
Use of extended function parameters Pr. 30
Pr. 53, Pr. 79
Operation mode selection
(Communication parameters n10, n17)
Acceleration/deceleration Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 20, Pr. 29, Pr. 44,
time/pattern adjustment Pr. 45
Selection of output characteristics
Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19
optimum for load characteristics
Output frequency restriction (limit) Pr. 1, Pr. 2
Pr. 1, Pr. 38, Pr. 39,
Operation over 60Hz <50Hz>
Related to operation

Calibration parameter C4, C7


Adjustment of frequency setting signals Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 73,
and outputs Calibration parameter C2 to C7
Motor output torque adjustment Pr. 0, Pr. 98
Brake operation adjustment Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 24, Pr. 25,
Multi-speed operation Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 82, Pr. 83,
Pr. 84, Pr. 85, Pr. 86, Pr. 87
Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Frequency jump operation Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr. 36
Automatic restart operation after
Pr. 57, Pr. 58
instantneous power failure
Slip compensation setting Pr. 95 to Pr. 97
Setting of output characteristics
Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 71
matching the motor
Electromagnetic brake operation timing Pr. 42, Pr. 64, Pr. 65
Related to appication

Pr. 0, Pr. 3, Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45,


Sub-motor operation
Pr. 46, Pr. 47
operation

Operation in communication with


Communication parameters n1 to n12
perasonal computer
Pr. 60 to Pr. 65, Pr. 73, Pr. 79, Pr. 88 to
Operation under PID control
Pr. 94
Noise reduction Pr. 70, Pr. 72

56

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Parameter Numbers
Purpose of Use
Parameter numbers which must be set
Pr. 54, Pr. 55, Pr. 56,
Frequency meter calibration
monitoring
Related to

Calibration parameter C1
Display of monitor on control panel or
Pr. 52, Communication parameter n16
parameter unit (FR-PU04)
Display of speed, etc Pr. 37, Pr. 52

Function write prevention Pr. 77


operationprevention
Related to incorrect

Reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 17), Pr. 78

Current detection Pr. 48 to Pr. 51, Pr. 64, Pr. 65

Motor stall prevention Pr. 21, Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 28

Input terminal function assignment Pr. 60 to Pr. 63


Output terminal function assignment Pr. 64, Pr. 65
Increased cooling fan life Pr. 76
Motor protection from overheat Pr. 9, Pr. 71
Others

Automatic restart operation at alarm


Pr. 66 to Pr. 69
stop
Setting of ground fault overcurrent
Pr. 40
protection
Inverter reset selection Pr. 75

57

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3 Explanation of Functions (Parameters)
2.3.1 Torque boost
Increase this value for use when the

Output voltage
inverter-to-motor distance is long or
motor torque is insufficient in the low
speed range (stall prevention is
activated).
Motor torque in the low-frequency
range can be adjusted to the load Pr.0
to increase the starting motor Setting range
Pr.46
torque.
0 Output frequency (Hz)
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
(Note) FR-S520 (S)-0.1K to 3.7K: 6%
FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K: 6%
6%/5%/4%
0 Torque boost 0 to 15% FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K: 6%
(Note) FR-S540-1.5K, 2.2K: 5%
FR-S540-3.7K: 4%
0 to 15%, - - -: Function invalid. Setting is
46 Second torque boost --- --- enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
<Setting>
Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %.
Use the RT signal to switch between two different torque boosts. (Turn on the RT
signal to make Pr. 46 valid(*).)
REMARKS
* The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other
second functions valid.
When using an inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), make setting as
indicated below.
• FR-S520-0.1K to 0.75K ..... 6%, FR-S520-1.5K to 3.7K ..... 4%
• FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K ..... 6%, FR-S540-1.5K ..... 4%,
FR-S540-2.2K, 3.7K ..... 3%
• FR-S520S-0.1K to 0.75K ..... 6%, FR-S520S-1.5K ..... 4%
• FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K ..... 6%
If you leave the factory setting as it is and change the Pr. 71 value to the setting for
use of the constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to the above value.
CAUTION
• Selecting automatic torque boost control makes this parameter setting invalid.
• A too large setting may cause the motor to overheat or result in an overcurrent
trip. The guideline is about 10% at the greatest.
♦Related parameters♦

RT signal (second function "Pr. 46") setting⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 "input terminal function
selection" (refer to page 88)
Constant-torque motor setting ⇒ Pr. 71 "applied motor" (refer to page 93)
Automatic torque boost control selection ⇒ Pr. 98 "automatic torque boost selection (motor
capacity)" (refer to page 109)

58

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.2 Maximum and minimum frequency
You can clamp the upper and
lower limits of the output Output frequency (Hz)
frequency.

Pr.1
Set frequency
Pr.2
0 5,10V
(4mA) (20mA)
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Setting Range
<EC version>
1 Maximum frequency 60Hz <50Hz> 0 to 120Hz
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz

<Setting>
Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the
frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is
clamped at the maximum frequency.
Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
REMARKS
When using the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) connected across
terminals 2-5 to perform operation above 60Hz <50Hz>, change the Pr. 1 and Pr. 38
(Pr. 39 when using the potentiometer across terminals 4-5) values.

CAUTION
When the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value, note
that the motor will run at the set frequency by merely switching the start signal
on, without entering the command frequency.

♦Related parameters♦

Starting frequency setting ⇒ Pr. 13 "starting frequency" (refer to page 65)
Maximum frequency setting using external potentiometer
⇒ Pr. 30 "extended function display selection" (refer to page 72), Pr. 38 "frequency setting 2
voltage gain frequency", Pr. 39 "frequency setting current gain frequency" (refer to page 74)

2.3.3 Base frequency, Base frequency voltage


Output voltage

Used to adjust the inverter


outputs (voltage, frequency) to
the motor rating. Pr.19
Output
frequency (Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47

59

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Factory
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
Base frequency 60Hz 
3 0 to 120Hz
<50Hz>
888: 95% of power supply voltage*2
Base frequency --- 0 to 500V, - - -: Same as power supply
19
voltage <888> 888, - - -*1 voltage*3
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
Second V/F (base 0 to - - -: Function invalid
47 ---
frequency) 120Hz, - - - Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
*1 0 to 800V, 888, - - - for FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K.
*2 1.9 times greater than the power supply voltage for the FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K.
*3 Twice greater than the power supply voltage for the FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K.
<Setting>
In Pr. 3 and Pr. 47, set the base frequency (motor's rated frequency).
Use the RT signal to switch between these two different base frequencies.
(Turn on the RT signal to make Pr. 47 valid.) (*)
When running the standard motor, generally set the "base frequency" to the rated
frequency of the motor. When running the motor using commercial power supply-
inverter switch-over operation, set the base frequency to the same value as the
power supply frequency.
When the frequency given on the motor's rating plate is only "50Hz", always set the
"base frequency" to "50Hz". Leaving the base frequency unchanged from "60Hz"
may make the voltage too low and the torque insufficient, resulting in an overload
trip. Special care must be taken when "1" is set in Pr. 14 "load pattern selection".
Set the base voltage (e.g. rated voltage of motor) in Pr. 19.

CAUTION
1. Set 60Hz in Pr. 3 "base frequency" when using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor.
2. When automatic torque boost is selected, Pr. 47 is invalid. When automatic
torque boost is selected, setting "- - -" or "888" in Pr. 19 uses the rated output
voltage.

REMARKS
* The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid.

♦Related parameters♦

When rated motor frequency is "50Hz" ⇒ Pr. 14 "load pattern selection" (refer to page 66)
RT signal (second function "Pr. 47") setting ⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function
selection) (refer to page 88)
Motor setting ⇒ Pr. 71 "applied motor" (refer to page 93)
Automatic torque boost selection ⇒ Pr. 98 "automatic torque boost selection (motor capacity)"
(refer to page 109)

60

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.4 Multi-speed operation to to
Used to switch between the predetermined running speeds.
Any speed can be selected by merely switching on/off the corresponding
contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
By using these functions with Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency", up to 17 speeds can be set.
This function is valid in the external operation mode or in the combined
operation mode which is available when Pr. 79 = "3" or "4".

Output frequency (Hz)


Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(high speed) Speed 10


Speed 5 Speed 11
Speed 2 Speed 12
Speed 6
(middle speed) Speed 9
Speed 3 Speed 4 Speed 13
(low speed) Speed 8 Speed 14
Speed 7 Speed 15

Time Time

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RH RH
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL RL
Priority: RL>RM>RH
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
REX REX

Factory
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
Multi-speed setting 60Hz
4 0 to 120Hz 
(high speed) <50Hz>
Multi-speed setting
5 30Hz 0 to 120Hz 
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
6 10Hz 0 to 120Hz 
(low speed)
Multi-speed setting 0 to 120Hz, "- - -" = no setting. Setting
24 to 27 ---
(speeds 4 to 7) --- enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
Multi-speed setting 0 to 120Hz, "- - -" = no setting. Setting
80 to 87 ---
(speeds 8 to 15) --- enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
<Setting> 2
Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters.
Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 120Hz during inverter
operation.
When the parameter of any multi-speed setting is read, turn the setting dial to
change the setting.
In this case, press the SET key ( WRITE key) to store the frequency. (This is also
enabled in the external mode.)
The setting is reflected by pressing the SET key ( WRITE key).
Assign the terminals used for signals RH, RM, RL and REX using Pr. 60 to Pr. 63.(*)

61

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
1. The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5, 4-5, setting dial).
When the multi-speed settings and setting dial are used in the combined operation mode
(Pr. 79=3), the multi-speed settings have precedence.
2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to
the frequency setting of the lower signal.
4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 80 to Pr. 87 settings have no priority between them.
5. The parameter values can be changed during operation.
6. When using this function with the jog signal, the jog signal has precedence.

REMARKS
* When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 60 to Pr. 63, the other functions
may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before
making setting.
The frequency-set external terminals have the following priority:
Jog > multi-speed operation > AU (terminal 4) > terminal 2
♦Related parameters♦

Maximum, minimum frequency setting ⇒ Pr. 1 "maximum frequency", Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency" (refer to page 59)
Assignment of signals RH, RM, RL, REX to terminals ⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal
function selection) (refer to page 88)
External operation mode setting ⇒ Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (refer to page 98)
Computer link mode ⇒ Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (refer to page 98), communication
parameter n10 "link start mode selection" (refer to page 131)
Speed command write ⇒ Communication parameter n9 "speed command write"
(refer to page 130)

2.3.5 Acceleration/deceleration time


Output frequency (Hz)

Used to set motor acceleration/


Pr.20 Running
deceleration time.
frequency
Set a larger value for a slower speed
Constant speed
increase/decrease or a smaller value
Deceleration Time
Acceleration
for a faster speed
Pr.7 Pr.8
increase/decrease. Pr.44 Acceleration Deceleration Pr.45
time time
Factory
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
7 Acceleration time 5s 0 to 999s 
8 Deceleration time 5s 0 to 999s 
Acceleration/
60Hz Setting is enabled when
20 deceleration reference 1 to 120Hz
<50Hz> Pr. 30 = "1".
frequency
Second acceleration/ Setting is enabled when
44 5s 0 to 999s
deceleration time Pr. 30 = "1".
- - -: Setting is
Second deceleration 0 to 999s,
45 --- acceleration time = enabled when
time ---
deceleration time. Pr. 30 = "1".

62

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
Use Pr. 7 and Pr. 44 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set
in Pr. 20 from 0Hz.
Use Pr. 8 and Pr. 45 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the
frequency set in Pr. 20.
Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on. (*)
Set "- - -" in Pr. 45 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44).
CAUTION
1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 71), the set time is
the period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3.
Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set frequency is
the base frequency or higher
4 T 5
t= × ×f2+ T
9 (Pr. 3)2 9
T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)
f : Set frequency (Hz)
Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz
(0Hz to set frequency)
Frequency setting (Hz)

60 120
Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)
5 5 12
15 15 35
2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 38 and
Pr. 39 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged.
To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 38 and Pr. 39.
3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 or Pr. 45 is "0", the acceleration/
deceleration time is 0.04 seconds.
4. If the acceleration/deceleration time is set to the shortest value, the actual motor
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest
acceleration/deceleration time which is determined by the mechanical system's J
(inertia moment) and motor torque. 2
* When the RT signal is on, the other second functions (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 46,
Pr. 47) are also selected.
♦Related parameters♦

Base frequency setting ⇒ Pr. 3 "base frequency" (refer to page 59)
Acceleration/deceleration pattern, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
⇒ Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" (refer to page 71)
Calibration function ⇒ Pr. 38 "frequency setting voltage gain frequency", Pr. 39 "frequency
setting current gain frequency" (refer to page 74)
RT signal setting ⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) (refer to page 88)
Jog acceleration/deceleration time ⇒ Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time"
(refer to page 67)

63

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.6 Electronic overcurrent protection
Set the current of the electronic overcurrent protection to protect the motor from
overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including
reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated output current * 0 to 50A
* 0.1K to 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
<Setting>
Set the rated current [A] of the motor.
(Normally set the rated current at 50Hz if the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated
current.)
Setting "0" in Pr. 9 disables electronic thermal O/L relay (motor protective function).
(The protective function of the inverter is activated.)
When using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, first set "1" in Pr. 71 "applied motor"
to choose the 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range. Then,
set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay".
CAUTION
• When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected
by the electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external thermal relay to each
motor.
• When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the
setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic overcurrent
protection will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
• A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection.
Use an external thermal relay.

♦Related parameters♦

When constant-torque motor is used ⇒ Pr. 71 "applied motor" (refer to page 93)

2.3.7 DC injection brake


Output frequency (Hz)

By setting the DC
injection brake voltage
(torque), operation time
and operation starting
Pr.10
frequency, the stopping "Operation
accuracy of positioning frequency"
operation, etc. or the Time
Pr.12
timing of operating the DC injection "Operation
DC injection brake to brake voltage voltage"
stop the motor can be Time
adjusted according to the
Pr.11 "Operation time"
load.
64

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
DC injection brake
10 3Hz 0 to 120Hz
operation frequency
Setting is enabled when
DC injection brake
11 0.5s 0 to 10s Pr. 30 = "1".
operation time
12 DC injection brake voltage 6% 0 to 15%
(When Pr. 11 is set to "0s" or Pr. 12 is set to "0%", DC injection brake is not operated.)
<Setting>
Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC injection brake operation is started.
Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated.
Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage.
Change the Pr. 12. setting to 4% when using the inverter-dedicated (constant-torque
motor).
If the Pr. 12 value remains unchanged from the factory setting and Pr. 71 is changed
to the setting for use of the constant-torque motor, the Pr. 12 setting is automatically
changed to 4%.

CAUTION
Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.

2.3.8 Starting frequency


The starting frequency at which Output frequency
the start signal is turned on can (Hz)
Setting range

60
be set in the range 0 to 60Hz.

Pr.13
0 Time
Frequency setting signal (V)
Foward rotation ON
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
13 Starting frequency 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
CAUTION
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in
Pr. 13 "starting frequency". 2
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the
frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.

CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value lower than Pr. 2 "minimum frequency",
simply turning on the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency if the
command frequency is not input.
♦Related parameters♦

Minimum frequency setting ⇒ Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" (refer to page 59)

65

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.9 Load pattern selection
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the
application and load characteristics.

Pr.14=0 Pr.14=1 Pr.14=2 Pr.14=3


For constant-torque For variable-torque For lift For lift
loads loads
(e.g. conveyor, cart) (Fan, pump)

100% 100% 100% 100%


Forward Reverse
voltage

voltage

voltage

voltage
Output

Output

Output

Output
rotation rotation

Pr.0 Reverse Pr.0 Forward


rotation rotation
Pr.46 Pr.46
Base frequency Base frequency Base frequency Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)

Boost for forward rotation Boost for forward rotation


...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting ...0%
Boost for reverse rotation Boost for reverse rotation
...0% ...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: For constant-torque loads Setting is
Load pattern 0, 1, 2, 1: For variable-torque loads enabled
14 0
selection 3 2: For vertical lift loads when Pr. 30
3: For vertical lift loads = "1".

CAUTION
1. When automatic torque boost control is selected, this parameter setting is
ignored.
2. Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other
second functions valid.

♦Related parameters♦

Automatic torque boost ⇒ Pr. 98 "automatic torque boost selection (motor capacity)" (refer to
page 109)
Boost setting ⇒ Pr. 0 "torque boost", Pr. 46 "second torque boost" (refer to page 58)
Assignment of RT signal to terminal when second torque boost is used
⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) (refer to page 88)

66

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.10 Jog frequency
To perform jog operation in the Output frequency (Hz)
external operation mode, choose Pr.20
the jog operation function in input
Jog frequency Forward
terminal function selection, turn on rotation
setting range
the jog signal, and use the start
signal (STF, STR) to make a start Pr.15
or stop. Pr.16
For the type having the RS-485
communication function, you can
ON
choose the jog operation mode JOG signal
from the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
ON
and perform jog operation using STF signal
the FWD or REV key.
(Can be read as the basic parameters when the FR-PU04 is connected.)
Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks
15 Jog frequency 5Hz 0 to 120Hz
Setting is enabled when
Jog acceleration/
16 0.5s 0 to 999s Pr. 30 = "1".
deceleration time
CAUTION
• In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the acceleration/deceleration
time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "base frequency", not Pr. 20
"acceleration/deceleration reference frequency".
• The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog
operation.
• The value set in Pr. 15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than the
Pr. 13 "starting frequency" setting.
• Assign the jog signal using any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function
selection).
♦Related parameters♦

Assignment of jog signal to terminal ⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection)
(refer to page 88)
Acceleration/deceleration pattern S-shaped acceleration/deceleration A 2
⇒ Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern" (refer to page 71)

2.3.11 RUN key rotation direction selection


Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating the RUN key of the
operation panel.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
RUN key rotation 0: Forward rotation Setting is enabled
17 0 0, 1
direction selection 1: Reverse rotation when Pr. 30 = "1".
Refer to (page 59)
Refer to , (page 62)
67

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.12 Stall prevention function and current limit function
You can make settings to disable stall prevention caused by overcurrent and to
disable the fast-response current limit (which limits the current to prevent the
inverter from resulting in an overcurrent trip if an excessive current occurs due to
sudden load variation or ON-OFF, etc. in the output side of the running inverter).
•Stall prevention
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output frequency of the inverter is
automatically varied to reduce the current.
•Fast-response Current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to
prevent an overcurrent.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Stall prevention 0 to 31, Setting is enabled when
21 0
function selection 100 Pr. 30 = "1".
Stall Stall
Prevention Prevention
Operation OL Signal Operation OL Signal
Fast- Selection Output Fast- Selection Output
Response : : Response : :
Current Activated Operation Current Activated Operation
Pr. 21 Pr. 21
Limit : Not continued Limit : Not continued
Set- activated Set- activated
: : : :
ting ting
Acceleration

Acceleration
Deceleration

Deceleration
Activated Operation Activated Operation
Constant

Constant
: Not not : Not not
speed

speed
activated continued activated continued
(*) (*)

0 16
1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
13 29
14 30
15 31
Regenerative Driving
100

68

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
•* When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "OLT" alarm
code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped.
(Alarm stop display " ")
• If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time
is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not stopped in the
preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set optimum values to the Pr. 21
and stall prevention operation level.
• When the fast-response current limit has been set in Pr. 21 (factory setting),
torque will not be provided at the Pr. 22 setting of 170% or higher. At this time,
make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated.
• In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is
not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.

CAUTION
Always perform test operation.
Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase the
acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden
speed changes.
Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase the
deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.

2.3.13 Stall prevention


Set the output current level at which the output frequency will be adjusted to
prevent the inverter from stopping due to overcurrent etc.
During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration
may not be made because the motor current does not increase. To improve
the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level
can be reduced in the high frequency region. This function is effective for
performing operation up to the high speed range on a centrifugal separator
etc. Normally, set 60Hz <50Hz> in Pr. 28 "stall prevention operation reduction
starting frequency" and 100% in Pr. 23.

Factory
2
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
Stall prevention operation
22 150% 0 to 200% 
level
Setting is
Stall prevention operation
0 to - - -: Pr. 22 enabled
23 level compensation factor ---
200%, - - - equally when
at double speed
Pr. 30 = "1".
Stall prevention operation 60Hz 0 to
28 
reduction starting frequency <50Hz> 120Hz

69

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


compensation factor (%)
Setting example

operation level (%)


operation level (%)

Pr.22 (Pr.22=150%,

Stall prevention
Stall prevention

When Pr.23 ="- - -"

Reduction ratio
Pr.23=100%, Pr.28=60Hz)
150
112.5
90
75
Pr.23

Pr.28 120Hz Output 0 60 80100120 Output


frequency (Hz) frequency (Hz)

<Setting>
Generally, set 150% (factory setting) in Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level".
Setting "0" in Pr. 22 disables stall prevention operation.
To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high frequency range, set the
reduction starting frequency in Pr. 28 "stall prevention operation reduction starting
frequency" and the reduction ratio compensation factor in Pr. 23.
Calculation expression for stall prevention operation level
Pr. 22 - A Pr. 23 - 100
Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [ ]×[ ]
Pr. 22-B 100
Pr. 28 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%) Pr. 28 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)
where, A = ,B=
output frequency (Hz) 120Hz

By setting "- - -" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is
constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 120Hz.
REMARKS
When the fast-response current limit is set in Pr. 21 "stall prevention function
selection" (factory setting), do not set any value above 170% in Pr. 22. The torque
will not be developed by doing so.
If the Pr. 22 value is set to higher than 170%, make setting in Pr. 21 to disable the
fast-response current limit.
In vertical lift applications, make setting so the fast-response current limit is not
cativated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.

CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed suddenly.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration
time, increasing the deceleration distance.

to Refer to to (page 61)

70

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.14 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern.
Set value 0 Set value 1 Set value 2
[Linear [S-shaped [S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration] acceleration/deceleration A] acceleration/deceleration B]
frequency (Hz)

frequency (Hz)

frequency (Hz)
f1
Output

Output

Output
fb
f2

Time Time Time


Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Acceleration/
29 deceleration 0 0, 1, 2 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1".
pattern

<Setting>
Pr. 29
Function Description
Setting
Linear
Acceleration is made to the set frequency linearly.
0 acceleration/
(Factory setting)
deceleration
For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration must be made in a short
time to a high-speed region of not lower than the base frequency.
S-shaped
Acceleration/deceleration is made in a pattern where fb (base
1 acceleration/
frequency) acts as the inflection point of an S shape, and you can
deceleration A (*)
set the acceleration/deceleration time which matches the motor
torque reduction in the constant-output operation region of not
lower than the base frequency.
For conveyor and other load collapse prevention applications, etc.
S-shaped Since acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape
2 acceleration/ from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency), this function
deceleration B eases shock produced at acceleration/deceleration and is
effective for load collapse prevention, etc.

CAUTION 2
* As the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time taken to reach the Pr. 3 "base
frequency" value, not the Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"
value. For details, refer to page 59.

♦Related parameters♦

Base frequency (acceleration/deceleration time setting) setting ⇒ Pr. 3 "base frequency"
(refer to page 59)
For setting of "1" (S-shaped acceleration/deceleration A)
⇒ Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time", Pr. 45 "second deceleration time" (refer to
page 62)

71

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.15 Extended function display selection
Used to display the extended function parameters.
Refer to page 46 for the extended function parameter list.
Refer to the instruction manual (basic) for the parameter setting method.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Extended function 0: Without display,
30 0 0, 1
display selection 1: With display

2.3.16 Frequency jump to


When it is desired to avoid Frequency jump
Running frequency (Hz)

resonance attributable to the Pr.36


3B
natural frequency of a mechanical Pr.35
3A
system, these parameters allow Pr.34
resonant frequencies to be 2B
Pr.33
jumped. Up to three areas may be 2A
set, with the jump frequencies set Pr.32 1B
to either the top or bottom point of Pr.31
1A
each area.
The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this
frequency.

Factory
Parameter Name Setting Range Remarks
Setting
31 Frequency jump 1A --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -
32 Frequency jump 1B --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -
- - -: Function invalid
33 Frequency jump 2A --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -
Setting is enabled when
34 Frequency jump 2B --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -
Pr. 30 = "1"
35 Frequency jump 3A --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -
36 Frequency jump 3B --- 0 to 120Hz, - - -

<Setting>
To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and Pr. 34 Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz
(30Hz and 35Hz), set 30Hz in Pr. 33 and 35Hz in Pr. 34.
To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.

CAUTION
During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.

REMARKS
Write inhibit error " " occurs if the frequency jump setting ranges overlap.

72

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.17 Speed display
You can change the output frequency indication of the operation panel and
parameter unit (FR-PU04) to the motor speed or machine speed.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: Output Setting is enabled
37 Speed display 0 0, 0.1 to 999
frequency when Pr. 30 = "1".

<Setting>
To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.

CAUTION
• The motor speed is converted from the output frequency and does not match the
actual speed.
• When you want to change the monitor (PU main display) of the operation panel,
refer to Pr. 52 "operation panel display data selection" and communication
parameter n16 "PU main display screen data selection".
• Since the operation panel indication is 3 digits, make a setting so that the monitor
value does not exceed "999". If the Pr. 1 value is higher than 60Hz and
Pr. 1 value × Pr. 37 value > 60Hz × 999
(write error) occurs when Pr. 1 or Pr. 37 is written.

REMARKS
When you set the speed in Pr. 37, the speed is monitored in the monitor frequency
setting mode.
At this time, setting can be made in the minimum setting increments of 0.01r/min.
Due to the restrictions on the resolution of the set frequency, the indication in the
second decimal place may differ from the setting.

CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine. 2
♦Related parameters♦

To choose running speed monitor display ⇒ Pr. 52 "operation panel display data selection"
(refer to page 82)
FR-PU04 display switching ⇒ Communication parameter n16 "PU main display screen data
selection" (refer to page 134)

73

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.18 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
to
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation
to the external frequency setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC).
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the
input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0
to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
60Hz<50Hz> Factory setting 60Hz<50Hz> Factory setting
frequency (Hz)

frequency (Hz)
( Pr.38 ) ( Pr.39 )

(Across (Across
Output

Output
terminals terminals
2-5) 4-5)
0Hz( C2 ) 0V 0Hz( C5 ) 4mA
5V or 10V 20mA
(0% C3 ) (100% C4 ) Pr.73 (20% C6 ) (100% C7 )
Frequency setting voltage signal Frequency setting current signal
Factory Setting Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
<EC version> Range
Frequency setting voltage gain 60Hz
38 1 to 120Hz
frequency <50Hz>
Frequency setting current gain 60Hz
39 1 to 120Hz
frequency <50Hz>
Frequency setting voltage bias
C2 (902) 0Hz 0 to 60Hz
frequency Setting is enabled
C3 (902) Frequency setting voltage bias 0% * 0 to 300% when Pr. 30 = "1".
C4 (903) Frequency setting voltage gain 96% * 0 to 300%
Frequency setting current bias
C5 (904) 0Hz 0 to 60Hz
frequency
C6 (904) Frequency setting current bias 20% * 0 to 300%
C7 (905) Frequency setting current gain 100% * 0 to 300%
* Settings may differ because of calibration parameters.
The parameter numbers within parentheses are those for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, operation from the operation panel is not accepted.

POINT
Bias setting for 0-5VDC (0-10VDC) input Use calibration parameters C2, C3 for setting.
Gain setting for 0-5VDC (0-10VDC) input Use Pr. 38, calibration parameter C4 for
setting.
Bias setting for 4-20mADC input Use calibration parameters C5, C6 for
setting.
Gain setting for 4-20mADC input Use Pr. 39, calibration parameter C7 for
setting.
(For 4 to 20mADC input, set "4" in any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function
selection) and assign AU (current input selection) to any of terminals RH, RM, RL
and STR, and turn on the AU signal.)

74

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
(1) How to change the highest frequency
(2) Adjusting the deviation of the highest frequency from the Pr. 38 (Pr. 39) setting.
(2)-1) Make adjustment with a voltage applied directly across terminals 2-5 (with a
current flowing across terminals 4-5)
(2)-2) Make adjustment at any point without a voltage applied across terminals
2-5 (without a current flowing across terminals 4-5)
Changing example When you want to use the 0 to 5VDC input frequency setting
potentiometer to change the 5V frequency from 60Hz to 50Hz
POINT
Pr. 38 is an extended function parameter. Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
Change Pr. 38 "frequency setting voltage gain frequency" to 50Hz.
(1) How to change the highest frequency
Operation Display
RUN
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation PU
mode indication. EXT

The inverter must be at a stop.


The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
PU
(Press the EXT key.)
The parameter
2. Press the MODE key to choose the parameter
MODE
number read
setting mode. previously
appears.
3. Turn the setting dial until the
parameter number 38 "frequency
setting voltage gain frequency" appears.
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(For the Pr. 30 setting method, refer to
the instruction manual (basic).)
4. Pressing the SET key shows the currently SET

set value. (60Hz)


5. Turn the setting dial to change
the set value to "50.0". (50Hz)

6. Press the SET key to set the value. SET

Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!! 2


By turning the setting dial , you can read another parameter.
Press the SET key to show the setting again.
Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.
The monitor/frequency setting indication cannot be changed to just 50Hz
... Why?
The calibration parameter C4 "frequency setting voltage gain" value must
be set. (Refer to next page (2))
REMARKS
To change the value to more than 60Hz <50Hz>, Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" must
be set to more than 60Hz <50Hz>.
75

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Changing example Changing the calibration parameter C4 "frequency setting
voltage gain" value
POINT
The calibration parameter C4 is an extended function parameter. Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(2) Adjusting a deviation of the highest frequency from the Pr. 38
(Pr. 39) setting.
(2)-1) Making adjustment with a voltage applied directly across
terminals 2-5 (with a current flowing across terminals 4-5)
Operation Display
RUN
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation PU
mode indication. EXT

The inverter must be at a stop.


The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
PU
(Press the EXT key) The parameter
2. Press the MODE key to choose the parameter number read
MODE
previously
setting mode. appears.
3. Turn the setting dial to show " ".
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(For the Pr. 30 setting method, refer to
the instruction manual (basic).)
4. Press the SET key to show " ". SET

When adjusting Pr. 38


5. Turn the setting dial until the calibration
parameter C4 "frequency setting
Analog voltage
voltage gain" appears. analog-to-digital
6. Press the SET key to show the analog SET
conversion value
(%) across
voltage analog-to-digital conversion value (%). terminals 2-5
7. Apply a 5V voltage. 2
3
4 5 6
7 *
8
(Turn the external potentiometer 1
9
10
connected to across terminals 2-5 to *The value is nearly 100 (%) in the
the maximum (any position).) maximum position of the potentiometer.
CAUTION
After performing operation in step 7, do not touch the setting dial until completion of calibration.
*
8. Press the SET
key to set the value. SET

Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!


(Adjustment complete)
*The value is nearly 100 (%) in the
maximum position of the potentiometer.
By turning the setting dial , you can read another parameter.
Press the SET key to return to the indication (step 4).
Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter ( ).
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD (AM-
5)does not indicate just 50Hz ... Why?
The calibration parameter C1 "FM (AM) terminal calibration" value must
be set. (For the setting method, refer to the instruction manual (basic).)
When write is performed, an error ( ) is displayed.
The gain and bias frequency settings are too close.
76

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2)-2) Making adjustment at any point with a voltage not applied
across terminals 2-5 (with a current not flowing across
terminals 4-5)
Operation Display
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation RUN
PU
mode indication. EXT

The inverter must be at a stop.


The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
PU
(Press the EXT key)
The parameter
2. Press the MODE key to choose the parameter MODE number read
setting mode. previously
appears.
3. Turn the setting dial to show " ".
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(For the Pr. 30 setting method, refer to
the instruction manual (basic).)
4. Press the SET key to show " ". SET

When adjusting Pr. 38


5. Turn the setting dial until the
calibration parameter C4 "frequency
setting voltage gain" appears.
6. Press the SET key to show the analog
voltage analog-to-digital conversion value (%). Current
operation
(The maximum value can be displayed by Analog voltage
merely turning the setting dial clockwise or SET analog-to-
digital
counterclockwise in this status by one conversion
pulse's worth of turns (there is tactile value (%)
feedback because of the notch type).)
7. Turn the setting dial to the maximum *
value (100%) or any point.
*The value is 100 (%) in the
maximum position of the
potentiometer.

8. Press the SET


key to set the value. SET
* 2
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
*The value is 100 (%) in the maximum
position of the potentiometer.
Turn the setting dial to read another parameter.
Press the SET
key to return to the indication (step 4).
Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter ( ).

REMARKS
For the way to change the output frequency setting of the frequency setting
potentiometer, refer to the instruction manual (basic).

77

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.3.19 Start-time ground fault detection selection
You can choose whether to make ground fault detection valid or invalid at a start.
Ground fault detection is executed only right after the start signal is input to the
inverter.
Factory
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
0: Ground fault detection for
Start-time ground Setting is
0 protection is not executed.
40 fault detection 0, 1 enabled when
<1> 1: Ground fault detection for
selection Pr. 30 = "1".
protection is executed.
CAUTION
1. If a ground fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 40, alarm output " " is detected
and the output is shut off.
2. If the motor capacity is less than 0.1kW, ground fault protection may not be
provided.

REMARK
When a ground fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 40, an approximate 20ms delay
occurs at every start.

2.4 Output Terminal Function Parameters


2.4.1 Up-to-frequency sensitivity
The ON range of the up-to- Running Adjustable
frequency signal (SU) output frequency range Pr.41
frequency (Hz)

when the output frequency


reaches the running frequency
Output

can be adjusted between 0 and


±100% of the running frequency.
This parameter can be used to Time
ensure that the running Output signal OFF ON OFF
frequency has been reached to (SU)
provide the operation start signal ON OFF
Start signal
etc. for related equipment.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Up-to-frequency Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 =
41 10% 0 to 100%
sensitivity "1".
REMARKS
Using Pr. 64 or Pr. 65 to change terminal assignment may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 90.)

♦Related parameters♦

Assignment of SU signal to terminal ⇒ Pr. 64 "RUN terminal function selection", Pr. 65 "A, B, C
terminal function selection" (refer to page 90)

78

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.4.2 Output frequency detection

frequency (Hz)
The output frequency detection
Forward Pr.42
signal (FU) is output when the rotation
output frequency reaches or Time

Output
exceeds the setting. This function Reverse
rotation Pr.43
can be used for electromagnetic
Output
brake operation, open signal, etc. signal ON ON
You can also set the detection of FU OFF OFF OFF
the frequency used exclusively for
reverse rotation.
This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake
operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical
lift operation, etc.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Output frequency
42 6Hz 0 to 120Hz  Setting is
detection
enabled
Output frequency
0 to 120Hz, - - -: Same as when Pr. 30
43 detection for reverse ---
--- Pr. 42 setting = "1".
rotation

<Setting>
Refer to the above chart and set the corresponding parameters.
When Pr. 43 "output frequency detection for reverse rotation" ≠ "- - -", the Pr.42
setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr.43 setting applies to reverse rotation.
Use Pr. 64 or Pr. 65 (output terminal function selection) to assign the terminal used
for FU signal output.

CAUTION
Using Pr. 64 or Pr. 65 to change terminal assignment may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦Related parameters♦

Assignment of FU signal to terminal ⇒ Pr. 64 "RUN terminal function selection", Pr. 65 "A, B, C 2
terminal function selection" (refer to page 90)

, Refer to , (page 62).


Refer to (page 58).
Refer to (page 59).

79

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.5 Current Detection Function Parameters
2.5.1 Output current detection functions
If the output remains higher than the Output current
100ms
detection
Pr. 48 setting during inverter operation
signal (Y12) OFF ON OFF
for longer than the time set in Pr. 49,

Output current
the output current detection signal Pr.48
(Y12) is output from the inverter's
open collector output terminal. Pr.49

Time

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Output current detection
48 150% 0 to 200%
level Setting is enabled when
Output current detection Pr. 30 = "1"
49 0s 0 to 10s
signal delay time

<Setting>
Parameter
Description
Number
Set the output current detection level.
48
100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection time. Set the time from when the output
49 current has risen above the Pr. 48 setting until the output current detection
signal (Y12) is output.

CAUTION
• Once turned on because the current has risen above the preset detection level,
the output current detection signal is held on for at least 100ms (approximately).
• Using Pr. 64 or Pr. 65 to change terminal assignment may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦Related parameters♦

Assignment of Y12 signal to terminal ⇒ Pr. 64 "RUN terminal function selection", Pr. 65 "A, B, C
terminal function selection" (refer to page 90)

80

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.5.2 Zero current detection
When the inverter's OFF ON
Start signal
Pr.50
output current falls to
"zero
"0", torque will not be current
generated. This may Output Pr.50
current 0 [A] 100ms detection
cause a gravity drop Zero current OFF ON OFF ON level"
when the inverter is detection signal
output (Y13) Pr.51 Pr.51
used in vertical lift detection time detection time
application.
To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to
close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Zero current detection
50 5% 0 to 200%
level Setting is enabled when Pr. 30
Zero current detection = "1"
51 0.5s 0.05 to 1s
time

POINT
If the output is lower than the Pr.50 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 51
during inverter operation, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the
inverter's open collector output terminal.
<Setting>
Parameter Description
Set the zero current detection level.
50 Set the level of zero current detection in terms of the percentage of the rated
inverter current from the output current value of 0 [A].
Set the zero current detection time.
51 Set a period of time from when the output current falls to or below the Pr. 50
setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
CAUTION
• If the current falls below the preset detection level but the timing condition is not
satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.
• When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 64, Pr. 65, the other functions 2
may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before
making settings.
• When one inverter is used to run (connect) multiple motors sequentially, the zero
current detection signal (Y13) may be output. Set 13% or more for the 0.1K, and
8% or more for the 0.2K. (If the sum of motor capacities is less than the zero
current detection level current or if the motor capacity per motor is less than the
zero current detection level current)
♦Related parameters♦

Assignment of Y13 signal to terminal ⇒ Pr. 64 "RUN terminal function selection", Pr. 65 "A, B, C
terminal function selection" (refer to page90)

81

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.6 Display Function Parameters
2.6.1 Monitor display
You can choose the display of the operation panel "monitor/frequency setting
screen".
For the Pr. 54 function, the Japanese version has the FM terminal feature, and
the NA and EC versions have the AM terminal feature.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Operation panel
0, 1,
52 display data 0
100
selection Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
FM (AM) terminal
54 0 0, 1
function selection
POINT

You can also use the SET key to change the display. (Refer to the instruction
manual (basic) for the operation procedure.)
The pulse train output terminal FM (analog voltage output terminal AM) is
available for signal output. (Make selection using the Pr. 54 "FM (AM) terminal
function selection" value.)
<Setting>
Parameter Setting
Pr. 52 Pr. 54 Full-Scale Value of FM
Signal Type Unit
Operation panel FM (AM) (AM) Level Meter
LED terminal
Output Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
Hz 0/100 0
frequency reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
Output current A 1 1
reference"
When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the monitor value changes depending on whether the
inverter is during stop or running.
Pr. 52
0 100
During running/stop During stop During running
Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency
REMARKS
• During an error, its definition appears.
• During reset, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
• For selection of the parameter unit (FR-PU04) monitor display, refer to the
communication parameter n16 "PU main display screen data selection". (Page 134)
CAUTION
The unit displayed on the operation panel is only A and other units are not displayed.
♦Related parameters♦

Speed display ⇒ Pr. 37 "speed display" (refer to page 73)
Adjustment of FM (AM) level meter full-scale value ⇒ Calibration parameter C1 "FM (AM)
terminal calibration" (refer to page 111)
Monitoring reference ⇒ Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference", Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference" (refer to page 84)
82

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.6.2 Setting dial function selection
You can use the dial like a potentiometer to perform operation.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: Setting dial
frequency setting
Setting is
Frequency setting mode
53 0 0, 1 enabled when
operation selection 1: Setting dial
Pr. 30 = "1"
potentiometer
mode

Using the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation

POINT
Set "1" (extended function parameter valid) in Pr. 30 "extended function display
selection".
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 53 "frequency setting operation
selection".

Operation example Changing the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation

Operation Display
RUN
1. Mode/monitor check PU

Choose monitor/frequency monitor. ( MODE key) EXT

The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.


PU
(Press the EXT key.)
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
Pr. 53 must be set to "1".
RUN
2. Press the RUN key to start the inverter. RUN PU
EXT

3. Turn the setting dial clockwise until


"60.0" appears. The flickering frequency is
the set frequency.
2
You need not press the SET key. Flickers for 3s.

REMARKS
• If flickering "60.0" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 53 "frequency setting operation selection"
setting may not be "1".
• Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can
be set by merely turning the dial.
• When the frequency is changed, it will be stored as the set frequency often 10 seconds.
Refer to (page 82).

83

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.6.3 Monitoring reference
Set the frequency or 1440 pulses/s (terminal FM) 1440 pulses/s (terminal FM)
current which is (5VDC (terminal AM)) (5VDC (terminal AM))

Output or display

Output or display
referenced when the
output frequency or
output current is selected
for the FM (AM) terminal.
• The Japanese Output Output
Pr.55 Pr.56
version has the FM frequency frequency
terminal feature, and
the NA and EC
versions have the AM
terminal feature.
Factory
Setting
Parameter Name Setting Remarks
Range
<EC version>
Frequency monitoring 60Hz
55 0 to 120Hz
reference <50Hz> Setting is enabled
Current monitoring Rated output when Pr. 30 = "1"
56 0 to 50A
reference current
<Setting>
Refer to the above diagrams and set the frequency monitoring reference value in
Pr. 55 and the current monitoring reference value in Pr. 56.
Pr. 55 is set when Pr. 54 "FM (AM) terminal function selection" = "0" and Pr. 56 is set
when Pr. 54 = "1".
Set the Pr. 55 and Pr. 56 values so that the output pulse train output of terminal FM is
1440 pulses/s (the output voltage of terminal AM is 5V).
CAUTION
• The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400pulses/s. If Pr. 55 is not
adjusted, the output of terminal FM will be filled to capacity. Therefore, adjust Pr. 55.
• The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 5VDC.

2.7 Restart Operation Parameters


2.7.1 Restart setting
At power restoration after an instantaneous power failure, you can restart the
inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting).

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Restart 0 to 5s,
57 ---
coasting time ---
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
Restart cushion
58 1s 0 to 60s
time

84

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter Setting Description
0.1K to
Coasting time of 0.5s
1.5K Generally, this setting will
0
2.2K, pose no problems.
Coasting time of 1.0s
3.7K
57 Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is
restored from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time
0.1 to 5s
between 0.1 and 5s according to the inertia moment (J) and
torque of the load.)
--- No restart
Normally the motor may be run with the factory settings. These
58 0 to 60s
values are adjustable to the load (inertia moment, torque).
Instantaneous power CAUTION
failure (power failure) time Automatic restart operation after
Power supply instantaneous power failure is a
(R<L1>, reduced voltage starting system in
S<N>, T)
which the output voltage is risen
gradually at the preset frequency
STF(STR) independently of the coasting speed
of the motor.
Motor speed It is a system which outputs the
(r/min) output frequency before an
Inverter output
instantaneous power failure, unlike
the motor coasting speed detection
frequency
system (speed search system) used
(Hz) by the FR-E500 series Mitsubishi
Inverter output transistorized inverters. Hence, if
voltage the instantaneous power failure time
(V) is 0.2s or longer, the frequency
before an instantaneous power
Restart failure cannot be stored in memory
Coasting time voltage and the inverter restarts at 0Hz.
Pr. 57 setting rise time The SU and FU signals are not
Pr. 58 setting output during a restart. They are
output after the restart cushion time
has elapsed.

CAUTION 2
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected,
the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the restart coasting time has
elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from
the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure,
apply in easily visible places the CAUTION seals supplied to the instruction
manual (basic).
The motor is coasted to a stop as soon as you turn off the start signal or press
STOP
the RESET key during the restart cushion time after instantaneous power failure.

85

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.8 Additional Function Parameters
2.8.1 Remote setting function selection
If the operator panel is located away from the control box, you can use contact
signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
frequency (Hz)

When Pr. 59="2"


When Pr. 59="1"
*
Output

ON ON
Acceleration(RH) ON
ON
Deceleration(RM)
Clear(RL) ON
Forward rotation ON ON ON ON
(STF)
Power supply ON ON

* External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than at multiple


speeds
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Remote setting
59 0 0, 1, 2 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
function selection

REMARKS
• When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be
compensated for as follows:
External operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus external
analog frequency command
PU operation mode Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus setting dial
or PU digital preset frequency
<Operation panel operation procedure>
Monitor, frequency Turn setting dial to Press SET key to
setting mode MODE make correction. complete setting.*

* When you have set "1" in Pr. 53 "frequency setting operation selection", you
need not press the SET key.

86

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
Operation
Pr. 59 Setting Frequency setting storage
Remote setting function
function (E2PROM)
0 No ——
1 Yes Yes
2 Yes No

Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether
the frequency setting storage function* in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When "remote setting function - yes" is selected, the functions of terminals RH, RM
and RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).
Use Pr. 60 to Pr. 62 (input terminal function selection) to set the signals RH, RM, RL.
* Frequency setting storage function
The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) is stored in
memory.
When power is switched off once and then on again, the inverter resumes
running at this setting of output frequency. (Pr. 59="1")

<Frequency setting storage conditions>


Frequency as soon as the start signal (STF or STR) turns off.
Frequency when the RH (acceleration) or RM (deceleration) signal has remained off
for longer than 1 minute.

REMARKS
A restart (STF signal ON) after ON-OFF of the clear signal (RL) should be made
after more than 1 minute has elapsed. The output frequency provided when a
restart is made within 1 minute is the output frequency given after the clear signal
(RL) is turned off (multi-speed frequency).
frequency(Hz)

(*2)
(*1)
2
Output

Acceleration (RH) ON ON
Clear (RL) ON ON
Forward rotation ON ON
ON ON
(STF)
ON ON
Power supply
1 minute or less More than 1 minute
(*1) External operation frequency or PU operation frequency except multi-speed
(*2) Multi-speed frequency

87

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
• The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)
between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr. 1 setting).
• When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency
varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"
or Pr. 45 "second deceleration time". The output frequency acceleration and
deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 "acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "deceleration
time", respectively. Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual
output frequency.
• If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or
deceleration (RM) signal varies the preset frequency.

CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the
machine.

♦Related parameters♦

Maximum frequency setting ⇒ Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" (refer to page 59)
Output frequency acceleration/deceleration time ⇒ Pr. 7 "acceleration time",
Pr. 8 "deceleration time" (refer to page 62)
Time setting for acceleration/deceleration ⇒ Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time",
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
(refer to page 62)

2.9 Terminal Function Selection Parameters


2.9.1 Input terminal function selection
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
RL terminal
60 function 0
selection
RM terminal
0 to 10,
61 function 1
14, 16
selection
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
RH terminal
62 function 2
selection
STR terminal 0 to 10,
63 function --- 14, 16,
selection ---

88

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Signal
Setting Functions Related Parameters
Name
Low-speed operation Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 59 = "0"
command Pr. 80 to Pr. 87
0 RL
Remote setting
Pr. 59 = "1", "2" (*1) Pr. 59
(setting clear)
Middle-speed Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr.24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 59 = "0"
operation command Pr.80 to Pr. 87
1 RM
Remote setting
Pr. 59 = "1", "2" (*1) Pr. 59
(deceleration)
High-speed operation Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 59 = "0"
command Pr. 80 to Pr. 87
2 RH
Remote setting
Pr. 59 = "1", "2" (*1) Pr. 59
(acceleration)
3 RT Second function selection Pr. 44 to Pr. 47
4 AU Current input selection 
5 STOP Start self-holding selection 
6 MRS Output shut-off stop 
External thermal relay input (*2)
The inverter stops when the externally
7 OH provided overheat protection thermal Refer to page 140.
relay, motor's embedded temperature
relay etc. is actuated.
15-speed selection (combination with 3 Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
8 REX
speeds RL, RM, RH) (*3) Pr. 80 to Pr. 87
9 JOG Jog operation selection Pr. 15, Pr. 16
10 RES Reset Pr. 75
14 X14 PID control presence/absence selection Pr. 88 to Pr. 94
16 X16 PU-external operation switch-over Pr. 79 (setting: 8)
(can be assigned to STR
--- STR Reverse rotation start
terminal (Pr. 63) only)
*1 When Pr. 59 = "1 or 2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as
listed above.
*2 Actuated when the relay contact "opens".
*3 When using the REX signal, an external command cannot be used to make a
2
reverse rotation start.

REMARKS
• One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the function
is activated when one of the multiple terminals used for assignment turns on.
• The speed command priorities are higher in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH,
RM, RL, REX) and AU.
• Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting.
They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed
setting and need not be set at the same time.)

89

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.9.2 Output terminal function selection
You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range

RUN terminal
64 function 0
selection
0, 1, 3, 4,
11 to 16, Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
98, 99
A, B, C
terminal
65 99
function
selection

<Setting>
Signal Parameters
Setting Function Operation
Name Referred to
Output during operation when the
0 RUN Inverter running inverter output frequency rises to or Pr. 2, Pr.13
above the starting frequency.
Output when the output frequency is
1 SU Up to frequency Pr. 41
reached.
Output while stall prevention function Pr. 21, Pr. 22,
3 OL Overload alarm
is activated. Pr. 23, Pr. 28
Output frequency Output when the output frequency
4 FU Pr. 42, Pr. 43
detection rises to or above the setting.
Output when the inverter is ready to
Inverter operation
11 RY be started by switching the start —
ready
signal on.
Output current Output when the output current rises
12 Y12 Pr. 48, Pr. 49
detection to or above the setting.
Zero current Output when the output current
13 Y13 Pr. 50, Pr. 51
detection reaches 0.
14 FDN PID lower limit
15 FUP PID upper limit Outputs the detection signal under
Pr. 88 to Pr. 94
PID forward-reverse PID control.
16 RL
rotation output
Output when a minor fault (fan failure
98 LF Minor fault output or communication error warning) Pr. 76, Pr. n5
occurs.
Output when the inverter's protective
99 ABC Alarm output function is activated to stop the output —
(major fault).

REMARKS
The same function may be set to more than one terminal.

90

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.10 Operation Selection Function Parameters
2.10.1 Retry function
When any protective function (major fault) is activated and the inverter stops its
output, the inverter itself resets automatically and performs retries. You can
select whether retry is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries
made, and waiting time.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
66 Retry selection 0 0 to 3
Number of 0, 1 to
67 retries at alarm 0 10, 101
occurrence to 110
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
Retry waiting 0.1 to
68 1s
time 360s
Retry count
69 0 0
display erase

<Setting>
Use Pr. 66 to choose the protective functions (major failures) for retries.
Protective Functions (Major Failures) for Retries
Pr. 66 Setting
OCT OVT THM THT FIN GF OHT OLT PE PUE RET CPU OPT
0
1
2
3
* Indicates the retry items selected. (OCT denotes any of OC1 to OC3 and OVT
any of OV1 to OV3.)

Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.


Pr. 67 Setting Number of Retries Alarm Signal Output
0 Retry is not made. ———
1 to 10 1 to 10 times Not output every time *
101 to 110 1 to 10 times Output every time
2
* If the retry count is exceeded, " " (retry count excess) is displayed.
Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart
in the range 0.1 to 360s.
Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times
made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times.

91

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
• The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation is
regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without the
protective function (major fault) activated during a period four times longer than
the time set in Pr. 68.
• If the protective function (major fault) is activated consecutively within a period four
times longer than the above waiting time, the control panel may show data different
from the most recent data or the parameter unit (FR-PU04) may show data different
from the first retry data. The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the
protective function (major fault) which was activated the first time.
• When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the stored
data of the electronic overcurrent protection, etc. are not cleared. (Different from
the power-on reset.)

CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and
machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has
elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm.
When you have selected the retry function, apply in easily visible places the
CAUTION seals supplied to the instruction manual (basic).

2.10.2 PWM carrier frequency


You can change the motor sound.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
70 Soft-PWM setting 1 0, 1
Setting is enabled when
PWM frequency
72 1 0 to 15 Pr. 30 = "1"
selection
REMARKS
By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor
tone.
Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending
complex tone.
<Setting>
Parameter
Setting Description
Number
0 Soft-PWM invalid
70
1 When any of "0 to 5" is set in Pr. 72, Soft-PWM is made valid.
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
72 0 to 15 The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz.
REMARKS
An increased PWM frequency will decrease motor noise but noise and leakage
current will increase. Take proper action (Refer to pages 18).
Metallic sound may be generated from the motor at sudden deceleration but it is not a
fault.
92

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.10.3 Applied motor
Set the motor used.
POINT
When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set "1" in Pr. 71 for either V/F
control or automatic torque boost control.
The electronic overcurrent protection is set to the thermal characteristic of the
constant-torque motor.
When you selected the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, the values of the
following parameters are automatically changed. (For factory settings only)
Pr. 0 "torque boost", Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage", Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks
71 Applied motor 0 0, 1 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"

<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71 Setting Electronic Overcurrent Protection Thermal Characteristic
0 Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor
1 Thermal characteristics matching the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor

CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.

2.10.4 Voltage input selection


You can change the input (terminal 2) specifications in response to the frequency
setting voltage signal. When entering 0 to 10VDC, always make this setting.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Terminal 2 input voltage
0-5V/0-10V Setting is enabled
73 0 0, 1 0: 0-5VDC input
selection when Pr. 30 = "1"
1: 0-10VDC input
CAUTION
The acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the 2
acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in
Pr. 73 setting.
When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer across terminals 10-2-5 for
operation, always set "0" in this parameter.

93

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.10.5 Input filter time constant
You can set the input section's built-in filter constant for an external voltage or
current frequency setting signal.
Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.
Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks
Input filter time Setting is enabled when
74 1 0 to 8
constant Pr. 30 = "1"

REMARKS
Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to
noise. A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set
between approximately 1ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8. A larger setting results
in a larger filter time constant.)

2.10.6 Reset selection/PU stop selection


You can make reset input acceptance selection and choose the stop function
from the operation panel (PU).
Reset selection : You can choose the reset function input (RES signal)
timing.
PU stop selection: When an alarm etc. occurs in any operation mode, you can
make a stop from the operation panel by pressing the
STOP
RESET key.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Reset selection/ 0, 1,
75 14 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
PU stop selection 14, 15

<Setting>
Pr. 75
Reset Selection PU Stop Selection
Setting
STOP
0 Reset input normally enabled. The PU stop key is invalid. Note that the RESET

Enabled only when the protective key is valid only in the PU operation mode or
1
function is activated. combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "4").
STOP
14 Reset input normally enabled. Pressing the RESET key decelerates the
Enabled only when the protective inverter to a stop in any of the PU, external and
15
function is activated. communication operation modes.

94

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


STOP
(1) How to make a restart after a stop by the RESET key input from the
operation panel (Restarting method with shown)
1) After completion of deceleration to

Speed
a stop, switch off the STF or STR
signal.
PU PU
Time
2) Press the EXT key to EXT key
Control panel
PU STOP
key
show . ........ ( canceled) STF ON RESET
PU EXT (STR) OFF
3) Press the key to return to
EXT .
4) Switch on the STF or STR signal. Stop and restart example for external operation

REMARKS
• By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off its
output while it is reset, the internal thermal summation value of the electronic
overcurrent protection and the number of retries are reset, and the motor coasts.
• The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed,
this setting will not return to the initial value.
• When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, the display alternates
between and . An alarm is not output.
STOP
(2) How to make a restart when a stop is made by the RESET key
input from the PU
1) After completion of deceleration
Speed

to a stop, switch off the STF or


STR signal.
Time
2) Press the EXT key EXT key
Control panel
. ..................... ( canceled) STOP key
STF ON RESET
3) Switch on the STF or STR signal. (STR) OFF

Stop and restart example for external operation


Besides the above operations, a restart can be made by performing a power-on reset
or resetting the inverter with the inverter's reset terminal.
2
REMARKS
• By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off output
while it is reset, the data of the electronic overcurrent protection and regenerative
brake duty are reset, and the motor coasts.
• To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is connected
securely.
• The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed,
this setting will not return to the initial value.
• When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an
alarm is not output.

95

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to potentially
hazardous conditions.

2.10.7 Cooling fan operation selection


You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter (whether there
is a cooling fan or not depends on the model.).
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Cooling fan 0: Operation is performed with Setting is
76 operation 1 0, 1 power on. enabled when
selection 1: Cooling fan ON/OFF control Pr. 30 = "1"
<Setting>
Setting Description
0 Operated at power on (independent of whether the inverter is running or at a stop).
Cooling fan ON/OFF control valid
Always on during inverter operation
During stop (reset or error), the inverter status is monitored and the fan is
1
switched on/off according to the temperature.
Heat sink temperature is less than 40ºC (104ºF) ..............Cooling fan off
Heat sink temperature is not less than 40ºC (104ºF) ........Cooling fan on

REMARKS
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, is shown on
the control panel, and the minor fault (LF) signal is output. Use any of Pr. 64, Pr. 65
(output terminal function selection) to allocate the terminal used to output the LF
signal.
Pr. 76 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
Pr. 76 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command or the fan
starts during fan OFF command.

CAUTION
When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 64, Pr. 65, the other functions
may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals before
making settings.

96

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.10.8 Parameter write inhibit selection
You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. This function is
used to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by incorrect operation.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Parameter
77 write disable 0 0, 1, 2 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
selection

<Setting>
Pr. 77 Setting Function
Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the PU operation
0
mode. (*)
Write disabled.
1
Values of Pr. 22, Pr. 30, Pr. 75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 can be written.
Write can be performed during operation. Write can be performed
2
independently of the operation mode.

CAUTION
• * The parameters * screened in the parameter list can be set at any time. Note
that the Pr. 70 and Pr. 72 values may be changed during PU operation only.
• If Pr. 77 = 2, the values of Pr. 17, Pr. 23, Pr. 28, Pr. 60 to Pr. 63, Pr. 71, Pr. 79,
Pr. 98, Pr. 99, CLr cannot be written during operation. Stop operation when
changing their parameter settings.
• By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited:
Parameter clear
All clear
2

97

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.10.9 Reverse rotation prevention selection
This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect
input of the start signal.

POINT
Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump.
(The setting of this function is valid for the combined, PU, external and
communication operations.)

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Reverse rotation
78 prevention 0 0, 1, 2 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
selection

<Setting>
Pr. 78 Setting Function
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disallowed
2 Forward rotation disallowed

2.10.10 Operation mode selection


Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
The inverter can be run from the control panel or parameter unit (PU operation),
with external signals (external operation), or by combination of PU operation and
external operation (external/PU combined operation).
The inverter is placed in the external operation mode at power-on (factory setting).

Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range


79 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 7, 8

98

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
In the following table, operation using the control panel or parameter unit is
abbreviated to PU operation.
RUN

Pr. 79 LED Indication * PU


Function
Setting EXT
RUN PU EXT
At power-on, the inverter is put in the external
operation mode. The operation mode can be
changed between the PU and external operation Refer to
PU
0 modes from the operation panel ( key) or settings "1"
EXT
and "2".
parameter unit ( PU EXT key). For each mode,
/
refer to the columns of settings 1 and 2.
Operation Start Off: Stop without start
Running frequency
mode signal On
1 command Off
PU operation Setting from operation RUN (Off)
mode panel or FR-PU04 key Forward rotation: On
External signal input External Reverse rotation:
External
(across terminals signal input Slow flickering
2 operation Off On
2(4)-5, multi-speed (terminal With start
mode
selection, jog) STF, STR)
Dial of operation command
Fast
panel, digital setting by Without
External flickering
External/ PU parameter unit key frequency
combined operation, or external signal input setting
3 operation signal input (multi- (terminal
mode 1 speed setting, across STF, STR)
terminals 4-5 (valid On On
when AU signal is on))
External/ PU External signal input
combined (across terminals RUN key
4 operation 2(4)-5, multi-speed
mode 2 selection, jog)
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
MRS signal ON ... Able to be switched to PU
operation mode (output stop
7 during external operation)
MRS signal OFF .. Switching to PU operation Refer to
mode inhibited settings "1"
Operation mode change using external signal and "2". 2
(disallowed during operation)
8 X16 signal ON ..... Switched to external
operation mode
X16 signal OFF.... Switched to PU operation mode

REMARKS
Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation. These
settings differ in starting method.
In case of the type having the RS-485 communication function, refer to page 116 for
the computer link operation mode.
*1. When the FR-PU04 is connected, the LED indication (PU, EXT) is not lit.
*2. The LED indication (PU, EXT) flickers in the computer link operation mode.
*3. Lit when the operation panel is used. Extinguished when the FR-PU04 is used.
99

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(1) PU operation interlock
PU operation interlock forces the operation mode to be changed to the external
operation mode when the MRS signal switches off. This function prevents the inverter
from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left
unswitched from the PU operation mode.

1) Preparation
Set "7" in Pr. 79 (operation mode selection).
Set the terminal used for MRS signal input with any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal
function selection).
Refer to page 88 for Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection).

REMARKS
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 60 to Pr. 63, the other functions
may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.

2) Function
MRS Signal Function/Operation
Output stopped during external operation.
Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode.
ON
Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation mode.
PU operation allowed.
Forcibly switched to external operation mode.
OFF External operation allowed.
Switching to PU operation mode inhibited.

<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the MRS signal>


Operating Condition Operation Switching to
MRS Parameter
Operation Mode Operating Status PU Operation
Status Signal Write
mode (*2) Mode
During ON → OFF Allowed →
During stop Disallowed
stop (*1) disallowed
If external operation
PU → frequency setting
PU
During ON → OFF External and start signal are Allowed →
Disallowed
operation (*1) entered, operation is disallowed
performed in that
status.
Disallowed →
OFF → ON Allowed
During disallowed
During stop
stop Disallowed →
ON → OFF Disallowed
disallowed
External External
During operation → Disallowed →
OFF → ON Disallowed
During output stop disallowed
operation Output stop → Disallowed →
ON → OFF Disallowed
operation disallowed

100

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


REMARKS
If the MRS signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU
operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
*1. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of
whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off.
Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the MRS signal
is switched off with either of STF and STR on.
*2. Switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in
the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to act as the ordinary MRS
function (output stop). Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the signal acts as the
PU interlock signal.

(2) Operation mode switching by external signal


1) Preparation
Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79.
Use any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) to set the terminal
used for X16 signal input.

REMARKS
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 60 to Pr. 63, the other functions
may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
For details refer to page 88.
2) Function
This switching is enabled during an inverter stop only and cannot be achieved
during operation.
X16 Signal Operation Mode
ON External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode)
OFF PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode)
to Refer to to (page 61).

2.10.11 PID control to


The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or
pressure. 2
The voltage input signal (0 to +5V or 0 to +10V) or Pr. 93 setting is used as a
set point and the 4 to 20mA DC current input signal used as a feedback value
to constitute a feedback system for PID control.

POINT
Made valid by turning on the X14 signal. Use Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal
function selection) to make assignment.

101

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
PID action
88 20 20, 21
selection
PID proportional 0.1 to 999 %,
89 100%
band ---
0.1 to 999s,
90 PID integral time 1s
---
0 to 100%,
91 PID upper limit ---
--- Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
0 to 100%,
92 PID lower limit ---
---
PID action set
93 point for PU 0% 0 to 100%
operation
PID differential 0.01 to 10s,
94 ---
time ---

<Setting>
(1) Basic PID control configuration
Inverter circuit :
Motor
Pr. 93 or Treminal 2 PID operation Manipulated
+- 1 variable IM
Set point Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S

Terminal 4
Feedback signal (Process value)
Kp: Proportion constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time

(2) PID action overview


1) PI action [Operation example for stepped
A combination of proportional control changes of process value]
action (P) and integral control action (I) Deviation Set point
for providing a manipulated variable in
Process value
response to deviation and changes
with time. P action
Time

REMARKS I action
Time
PI action is the sum of P and I actions.

PI action
Time

102

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2) PD action [Operation example for proportional changes
A combination of proportional control of process value]
Set point
action (P) and differential control
action (D) for providing a manipulated Deviation
Process
variable in response to deviation value
P action
speed to improve the transient Time
characteristic.
D action
Time
REMARKS
PD action is the sum of P and D actions.
PD action
Time
3) PID action Set point
The PI action and PD action are
Deviation
combined to utilize the advantages of Process
both actions for control. value
P action
Time

REMARKS
I action
The PID action is the sum of P, I and D Time
actions. D action
Time

y=at 2 +bt+c

PID action
Time
4) Reverse action [Heating]
Increases the manipulated + X>0
Set point
variable (output frequency) if X<0
-
deviation X = (set point - Feedback signal
process value) is positive, (Process value)
and decreases the Set point 2
Deviation
manipulated variable if
deviation is negative. Cold up
Hot down
Process value

103

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


5) Forward action [Cooling]
Increases the manipulated + X>0
Set point
variable (output frequency) if X<0
-
deviation X = (set point - Feedback signal
(Process value)
process value) is negative,
and decreases the Process value
manipulated variable if Set point
Too cold down
deviation is positive. Hot up

Deviation

Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)


Deviation
Positive Negative
Reverse action ! "
Forward action " !
(3) Wiring example
Pr. 60 = 14 Inverter
Pr. 64 = 15 NFB Motor Pump
Power R(L1) U
Pr. 65 = 16 S(N) V IM P
Pr. 88 = 20 supply T W

Forward rotation STF Upper limit


For
Reverse rotation STR (Lower limit)
2-wire
SD Limit signal For
type
PID control RL(X14)(*3) common 3-wire
Detector type
selection RUN(FUP,FDN) Forward
Setting 10 (*2) rotation output
SE Reverse - + +- +
potentiometer 2
rotation output
(COM)
(OUT)

A
(24V)
(Set point setting) 5
C Forward (reverse)
4 rotation output
signal common
(Process value) 4 to 20mA
0 24V
DC
power supply (*1)

AC1
200/220V 50/60Hz

CAUTION
*1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications
of the detector used.
*2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 64, Pr. 65 settings.
*3. The input signal terminal used depends on the setting of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63.
• The contact input signal (AU Signal) need not be turned on.

104

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(4) I/O signals
Signal Terminal Used Function Description
Depending on PID control
X14 Turn on X14 to exercise PID control.
Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 selection
Input 2 2 Set point input Enter the set point for PID control.
Process value Enter the 4 to 20mADC process value
4 4
input signal from the detector.
Output to indicate that the process value
FUP Upper limit output
signal exceeded the upper limit value.
Output to indicate that the process value
FDN Lower limit output
Depending on signal exceeded the lower limit value.
Output
Pr. 64, Pr. 65 "Hi" is output to indicate that the output
Forward (reverse)
indication of the parameter unit is forward
RL rotation direction
rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it is
output
reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).
Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or in Pr. 93 and enter the process
value signal across inverter terminals 4-5.
To exercise PID control, turn on the X14 signal. When this signal is off, PID control is
not exercised.

Item Entry Description


When "0" is set in Pr. 73 (5V
Set 0V as 0% and 5V as 100%.
Across selected for terminal 2).
Set point terminals 2-5 When "1" is set in Pr. 73 (10V
Set 0V as 0% and 10V as 100%.
selected for terminal 2).
Pr. 93 Set the set point (%) in Pr. 93.
Process Across
4mA DC is equivalent to 0% and 20mA DC to 100%.
value terminals 4-5

(5) Parameter setting


Parameter
Name Setting Description
Number
PID action 20 For heating, pressure control, etc. PID reverse action
88 2
selection 21 For cooling, etc. PID forward action
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is
small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a
slight change of the process value. Hence, as the
PID
0.1 to 999% proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity
89 proportional
(gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
band
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
--- No proportional control

105

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Parameter
Name Setting Description
Number
Time required for the integral (I) action to provide the
same manipulated variable as that for the proportional
PID integral 0.1 to 999s
90 (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point
time
is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
--- No integral control.
Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds the
PID upper 0 to 100% setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value of
91
limit 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
--- No function
Set the lower limit. (If the feedback value falls below
the setting, the FDN signal is output. In this case, the
PID lower 0 to 100%
92 process value of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to
limit
100%.)
--- No function
Valid only when Pr. 79 = "3" (n9 = 0 for computer link
operation) under the PU command in the PU operation
or PU/external combined mode. (When the computer
PID action
has the speed command write in the computer link
93 set point for 0 to 100%
operation mode (NET))
PU operation
For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is the
set point.
(C3 value is equivalent to 0% and C4 value to 100%.)
Time required for the differential (D) action to provide
PID the same process value as that for the proportional (P)
0.01 to 10s
94 differential action. As the differential time increases, greater
time response is made to a deviation change.
--- No differential control.

(6) Adjustment procedure

Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 88 to Pr. 94.

Terminal setting Set the I/O terminals for PID control.


(Use Pr. 64 and Pr. 65 (output terminal function selection) to set the
FUP and FDN signals.)
(Use any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) to set
the X14 signal.)
Turn on X14 signal.

Run

106

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C (32°F) and 20mA at 50°C (122°F) is used to adjust the room
temperature to 25°C (77°F) under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter
terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)
START

....... Detector specifications


Convert the set point into %.
When the detector used has the specifications
Calculate the ratio of the set point that 0°C is equivalent to 4mA and 50°C (122°F) to
to the detector output. 20mA, the set point of 25°C (77°F) is 50% because
4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
Make calibration. ....... When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and
detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated,
make the following calibration*.
Set the set point. ....... Set point = 50%
Enter a voltage to across Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such
terminals 2-5 according to the set that 0% is equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V,
point (%). enter 2.5V into terminal 2.
For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%)
in Pr. 93.
Determine the set point.
....... Set the room temperature to 25°C (77°F)
Determine the set point of the item Set "20" or "21" in Pr. 88 and turn on the X14
to be adjusted. signal to enable PID control.

Operation ....... During operation, set the proportional band and


Set the proportional band and integral time to slightly higher values and set the
integral time to slightly higher differential time to "- - -" (No control). In accordance
values and the differential time to with the system operation, reduce the proportional
"- - -" (No control), and switch on band and integral time. For slow response system
the start signal. where a deadband exists, differential control
shuold be turned on and increased slowly.

Is the process Yes


value steady?

No
Adjust parameters. Optimize parameters.
2
Set the proportional band and While the process value is steady,
integral time to slightly higher values the proportional band and integral
and set the differential time to a time may be reduced and the
slightly lower value to stabilize the differential time increased
process value. throughout the operation.

END
*When calibration Use Pr. 38 and calibration parameters C2 to C4 (terminal 2)
is required and Pr. 39 and calibration parameters C5 to C7 (terminal 4) to
calibrate the detector output and set point setting input.
Make calibration in the PU mode when the inverter is at a stop.
107

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) across terminals 2-5.
2. Make calibration using the calibration parameters C2, C3. At this time, enter in C2
the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g.
0Hz). (When using the FR-PU04, make calibration with Pr. 902.)
3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 38 and calibration parameter C4. At this time, enter in
Pr. 38 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of
100% (e.g. 60Hz). (When using the FR-PU04, make calibration with Pr. 903.)

<Detector output calibration>


1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using the calibration parameter C6. (When using the FR-PU04,
make calibration with Pr. 904.)
3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using the calibration parameter C7. (When using the FR-PU04,
make calibration with Pr. 905.)
Note: The frequencies set in the calibration parameter C5 and Pr. 39 should be equal
to those set in the calibration parameter C2 and Pr. 38, respectively.
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting] [Detection value] [Manipulated variable]
Manipulated
variable (Hz)
(%) (%)
100 100 60

0 0 0
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation (%)

REMARKS
• If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (jog) signal is entered,
PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started.
• When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 60 to Pr. 65, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding terminals
before making settings.
• When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in the
calibration parameter C2 and the maximum frequency is the frequency set in
Pr. 38. (The Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency" settings
are also valid.)
♦Related parameters♦

X14 signal assignment ⇒ Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) (refer to page 88)
FUP, FDN and RL signal assignment ⇒ Pr. 64 "RUN terminal function selection", Pr. 65 "A, B,
C terminal function selection" (refer to page 90)
Voltage input selection (0 to ±5V, 0 to ±10V) ⇒ Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" (refer to page 93)
Operation mode selection ⇒ Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" (refer to page 98)
Making terminal calibration ⇒ Pr. 38, Pr. 39, C2 to C7 (calibration parameters) (refer to page 74)

108

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.11 Auxiliary Function Parameters
2.11.1 Slip compensation
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor
speed constant.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0 to 50%,
95 Rated motor slip ---
---
Slip compensation time Setting is enabled when
96 0.5s 0.01 to 10s
constant Pr. 30 = "1"
Constant-output region slip
97 --- 0, - - -
compensation selection

<Setting>
Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
Rated slip = ×100[%]
Synchronous speed at base frequency
Parameter Setting Function
0.01 to 50% Used to set the rated motor slip.
95
0, - - - Slip compensation is not made.
96 0.01 to 10s Used to set the slip compensation response time. (*)
Slip compensation is not made in the constant output
0
97 range (frequency range above the frequency set in Pr. 3).
--- Slip compensation is made in the constant output range.
* When this value is made smaller, response will be faster.
However, as load inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage (OVT) error is
more liable to occur.
REMARKS
When making slip compensation at 60Hz<50Hz>, set the maximum frequency to
slightly higher than 60Hz<50Hz>.
In the factory setting status, it is clamped at 60Hz<50Hz>.

2.11.2 Automatic torque boost selection 2


You can choose automatic torque boost control.
Automatic torque boost control
Not only gives the motor the optimum excitation but also provides high torque
even in a low speed range.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Automatic torque boost 0.1 to 3.7kW, Setting is enabled when
98 ---
selection (motor capacity) --- Pr. 30 = "1"

109

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Operating conditions>
The number of motor poles should be any of 2, 4 and 6 poles.
Single-motor operation (One motor for one inverter)
The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m (98.42feet).

<Setting>
Parameter Setting Description
--- Ordinary V/F control and torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) are valid.
98 0.1 to 3.7kW Automatic torque boost control valid
(*) (Set the applied motor capacity or one rank lower motor capacity.)
* The setting range changes with the inverter: 0.2kW to 3.7kW, - - - for the 400V
class.
Also when the Pr. 98 setting is other than "- - -", Pr. 3 "base frequency" and Pr. 19
"base frequency voltage" are valid.
When "- - -" or "888" is set in Pr. 19, the rated output voltage is selected.

CAUTION
* During operation using automatic torque boost, write to Pr. 3 and Pr. 19 is disabled
if "2" is set in Pr. 77.

♦Related parameters♦

Torque boost ⇒ Pr. 0 "torque boost", Pr. 46 "second torque boost" (refer to page 58)
Base frequency ⇒ Pr. 3 "base frequency", Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage" (refer to page 59)
Applied motor setting ⇒ Pr. 71 "applied motor" (refer to page 93)
Motor primary resistance ⇒ Pr. 99 "motor primary resistance" (refer to page 111)

110

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.11.3 Motor primary resistance
Generally this parameter need not be set. At the factory setting of "- - -", the
standard motor constant of the motor capacity set in Pr. 98 (including that of the
constant-torque motor) is used.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Motor primary 0 to 50Ω,
99 --- Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
resistance ---

♦Related parameters♦

Applied motor setting ⇒ Pr. 71 "applied motor" (refer to page 93)
Automatic torque boost selection ⇒ Pr. 98 "automatic torque boost selection (motor capacity)"
(refer to page 109)

2.12 Calibration Parameters


2.12.1 Meter (frequency meter) calibration
(Japanese version)
By using the control panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate a analog meter
connected to terminal FM to full scale deflection.
Terminal FM provides the pulse output. By setting the calibration parameter
C1, you can use the parameter to calibrate the analog meter connected to the
inverter without providing a calibration resistor.

Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks


FM terminal Setting is enabled when
C1 (900) ——— ———
calibration Pr. 30 = "1"
The parameter number in parentheses applies to when the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is
2
used.

111

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Changing example Deflecting the meter (analog indicator) to full-scale (1mA) at the
preset frequency of 60Hz (for frequency setting, refer to the
instruction manual (basic).)
POINT
The calibration parameters "C1" can be made to be ready by setting "1" (extended
function parameter valid) in Pr. 30 "extended function display selection".
Set the value of the calibration parameter C1 "FM terminal calibration".
Operation Display
In PU operation mode
The parameter
1. Press the key to choose the
MODE
MODE
number read
parameter setting mode. previously
appears.
2. Turn the setting dial to show
" ".
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(For details, refer to the instruction
manual (basic).)
3. Press the SET key to show
SET
" ".

4. Turn the setting dial until the


calibration parameter C1 "FM
terminal calibration" appears.
5. Press the SET key to enable setting. SET

RUN
6. If the inverter is at a stop, press the RUN PU
RUN key to start it. (The motor EXT

need not be connected.)


+
7. Turn the setting dial to
Analog indicator
adjust the indicator needle
to the desired position. -

8. Press the key.


SET SET

Setting is complete.
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
By turning the setting dial , you can read another parameter.
Press the SET key to return to the indication (step 3).
Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter ( ).

112

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


REMARKS
• Depending on the set value, it may take some for the needle to move.
• If "1" is set in Pr. 30 "extended function display selection", the calibration parameter
C1 "FM terminal calibration" can also be set in the external operation mode.
• C1 is factory-set to 1mA full-scale or 1440 pulses/s FM output frequency at 60Hz.
The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s.
• When a frequency meter is connected across terminals FM-SD to monitor the
running frequency, the FM terminal output is filled to capacity at the factory
setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz. In this case,
the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency.
• When the FR-PU04 is used, make calibration with Pr. 900.

POINT
By setting the Pr. 54 "FM terminal function selection" value, preset Pr. 55 "frequency
monitoring reference" or Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" to the running
frequency or current value at which the output signal is 1440 pulses/s.
At 1440 pulses/s, the meter generally deflects to full-scale.

2.12.2 Meter (frequency meter) calibration


(NA and EC version)
The AM terminal is factory-set to provide 5VDC output in the full-scale status of
each monitor item. However, calibration parameter C1 can be used to adjust the
output voltage ratio (gain) according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum
output voltage is 5VDC.

Parameter Name Factory Setting Setting Range Remarks


AM terminal Setting is enabled when
C1 (901) ——— ———
calibration Pr. 30 = "1"
The parameter number within the parentheses applies to when the parameter unit (FR-
PU04) is used.

113

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Changing example Deflecting the meter (analog indicator) to full-scale (5V) at the
preset frequency of 60Hz (for frequency setting, refer to the
instruction manual (basic).)
POINT
The calibration parameters "C1" can be made to be ready by setting "1" (extended
function parameter valid) in Pr. 30 "extended function display selection".
Set the value of the calibration parameter C1 "AM terminal calibration".
Operation Display
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation RUN
PU
mode indication. EXT
The inverter must be at a stop.
The parameter
2. Press the key to choose the
MODE
MODE
number read
parameter setting mode. previously
appears.
3. Turn the setting dial to show
" ".
Pr. 30 must be set to "1".
(For details, refer to the instruction
manual (basic)).
4. Press the SET key to show
SET
" ".

5. Turn the setting dial until the


calibration parameter C1 "AM
terminal calibration" appears.
6. Press the SET key to enable setting. SET

RUN
7. Press the RUN key to start the RUN PU
inverter. (The motor need not be EXT
connected.)
+
8. Turn the setting dial to
Analog indicator
adjust the indicator needle
to the desired position. -

9. Press the key.


SET SET

Setting is complete.
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
By turning the setting dial , you can read another parameter.
Press the SET key to return to the indication (step 4).
Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter ( ).

REMARKS
• Depending on the set value, it may take some for the needle to move.
• If "1" is set in Pr. 30 "extended function display selection", the calibration parameter
C1 "AM terminal calibration" can also be set in the external operation mode.
• When the FR-PU04 is used, make calibration with Pr. 901.

114

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


POINT
By setting the Pr. 54 "AM terminal function selection" value, preset Pr. 55 "frequency
monitoring reference" or Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference" to the running
frequency or current value at which the output signal is 5V.
At 5V, the meter generally deflects to full-scale.
♦Related parameters♦

Choosing signal to be output to FM (AM) terminal ⇒ Pr. 54 "FM (AM) terminal function
selection" (refer to page 82)
Reference values of frequency and current values ⇒ Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference",
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
(refer to page 84)
to Refer to , (page 74).

2.13 Clear Parameters


2.13.1 Parameter clear
Initializes the parameter values to the factory settings.
Clear the parameters during a stop in the PU operation mode.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: Clear is not executed.
1: Parameter clear *1
(Calibration parameters C1 to C7 Setting is
Parameter are not cleared) enabled
CLr 0 0, 1, 10
clear 10: All clear *2 when Pr. 30
(All settings including those of = "1"
the calibration parameters C1
to C7 return to factory settings)
*1 Parameters are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable
selection".
Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU stop selection", Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 53, Pr. 60 to Pr. 65,
Pr. 99, calibration parameters C1 to C7 and communication parameters n13,
n15 are not cleared.
*2 Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU stop selection" and communication parameter n13
"PU language switching" are not cleared.
REMARKS
2
For details of the operation procedure, refer to the instruction manual (basic).

2.13.2 Alarm history clear


Erases the alarm history.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Alarm history 0: Not cleared Setting is enabled
ECL 0 0, 1
clear 1: Alarm history clear when Pr. 30 = "1"

115

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.14 Communication Parameters (Only for the type having
the RS-485 communication function)
You can perform communication operation from the RS-485 connector of the
inverter through RS-485.
(1) Operational functions
1) Operation mode switching
[Operation mode switching method]
Switching by Switching by operation
computer panel/parameter
program unit (FR-PU04)
C A
Computer
External PU
link
operation operation
operation
D B

F
(Switching must
not be made)
Symbol Switching Type Switching Method
PU
A PU operation to external Using the EXT key of the operation panel or
operation PU EXT
/ key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
PU
B External operation to PU Using the EXT key of the operation panel or
operation PU EXT
/ key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
External operation to Using the H0000:
C Communication
computer link operation computer program Read (H7B)/
operation
Computer link operation to Using the Write (HFB)
D H0001: External
external operation computer program operation
Switching must not be made
E PU operation to computer (External operation may be selected at A and then
link operation switched to computer link operation at C *)
Switching must not be made
F Computer link operation to (External operation may be selected at D and then
PU operation switched to PU operation at B *)
* When "1" is set in the communication parameter n10 "link start mode selection",
the inverter is placed in the computer link operation mode at power-on or inverter
reset. (Note that it is overridden by the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting.)
REMARKS
Unlike the other inverters, the FR-S500 series is not the type of inverter whose
operation panel is removed to make communication.
When the setup software is used to switch to the PU operation mode (Pr. 79 = 1, 3,
4), parameter setting cannot be made. At that time, pressing the RUN key of the
operation panel starts the inverter.
116

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2) Operation mode-based functions
Operation Mode
Operation
Item External Computer link
Location PU operation
operation operation
Operation panel Enabled
Run command
or FR-PU04 Enabled (Combined Disabled
(start)
operation mode)
Enabled
Running frequency
Enabled (Combined Disabled
setting
operation mode)
Monitoring Enabled Enabled Enabled
Parameter write Enabled (*4) Disabled Disabled
Parameter read Enabled Enabled Enabled
Inverter reset Enabled Enabled Enabled
Stop command Enabled Enabled (*3) Enabled (*3)
On-computer Run command Disabled Disabled Enabled (*1)
user program by Running frequency
Disabled Disabled Enabled (*1)
RS-485 setting (*)
communication Monitoring Enabled Enabled Enabled
Parameter write Disabled Disabled Enabled (*4)
Parameter read Enabled Enabled Enabled
Inverter reset Disabled Disabled Enabled (*2)
Stop command Disabled Disabled Enabled
Control circuit Inverter reset Enabled Enabled Enabled
external Enabled
terminal Run command (Combined Enabled Enabled (*1)
operation mode)
Enabled
Running frequency
(Combined Enabled Enabled (*1)
setting
operation mode)
*1. As set in the communication parameters n8 "operation command write" and n9
"speed command write". (refer to page 130)
*2. At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset
from the computer.
*3. As set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU stop selection".
*4. As set in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
CAUTION
* When the user program of the computer is used to make the running frequency 2
setting by RS-485 communication, setting can be made in the minimum setting
increments of 0.01Hz, but the setting may be written to the inverter in increments
of 0.1Hz. (0 is written in the second decimal place.)

POINT
To make RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer, the
operation mode must be set to the "computer link operation mode".
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" ≠‚ "1, 3, 4"
and communication parameter n10 "link start mode selection" = "1"
Reset the inverter after setting the communication parameters n1, n2, n3, n4, n7,
n11. The values set are registered once the inverter is reset.
117

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.14.1 Communication settings to ,

Communication-related parameters
Factory
Setting Setting Reflection
Parameter Name Remarks
<NA, EC Range Timing
version>
Communication
n1 (331) 0 0 to 31 After reset
station number
Communication 48, 96,
n2 (332) 192 After reset
speed 192
0, 1, 10,
n3 (333) Stop bit length 1 After reset
11
Parity check
n4 (334) presence/ 2 0, 1, 2 After reset
absence Setting is enabled
Number of when Pr. 30 = "1"
0 to 10,
n5 (335) communication 1 Immediately
---
retries
Communication 0s 0, 0.1 to
n6 (336) check time <- - -> 999s, Immediately
interval (*1) (*2) ---
Wait time 0 to 150ms,
n7 (337) --- After reset
setting ---
n11 (341) CR/LF selection 1 0, 1, 2 After reset
*1. To make communication, set any value other than 0 in the communication
parameter n6 "communication check time interval".
*2. Factory setting of NA and EC versions.
The parameter numbers within parentheses are those for use of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04).
Refer to page 177 for the instruction codes.

Communication specifications
Item Computer
Conforming standard RS-485 Standard
Number of inverters
1:N (max. 32 inverters)
connected
Communication speed Selected between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps
Control protocol Asynchronous
Communication method Half-duplex
Communication

Character system ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable


specifications

Stop bit length Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits.


Terminator CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Parity
Check Selectable between presence (even/odd) and absence
check
system
Sumcheck Presence
Waiting time setting Selectable between presence and absence

118

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


REMARKS
• For computer link operation, set 65520 (HFFF0) as the value "888" and 65535
(HFFFF) as the value "- - -".
• Refer to page 41 for handling the RS-485 connector.
• Refer to the "parameter data code list" (page 177) for the data codes of the
parameters.
<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the
communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. If initial setting is not
made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made.
Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter. After
you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication
cannot be made unit the inverter is reset.
Parameter Description Setting Description
Station number specified for communication from
Communication the RS-485 connector.
n1 0 to 31
station number Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
48 4800 bps
Communication
n2 96 9600 bps
speed
192 19200 bps
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
n3 Stop bit length
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
7 bits
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
Parity check 0 Absent
n4 presence/ 1 Odd parity present
absence 2 Even parity present
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence
of a data receive error.
0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter will come to an
alarm stop (OPT).
Number of
If a communication error occurs, the inverter will
n5 communication
not come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter
retries
can be coasted to a stop by MRS or RES input.
---
During a communication error (H0 to H5), the minor
(65535)
fault signal (LF) is switched on. Allocate the used
terminal with any of Pr. 64, Pr. 65 (multi-function 2
outputs).
0 No communication
Set the communication check time [s] interval.
Communication
If a no-communication state persists for longer than
n6 check time 0.1 to 999
the permissible time, the inverter will come to an
interval
alarm stop (OPT).
--- Communication check suspension
Set the waiting time between data transmission to
0 to 150
n7 Wait time setting the inverter and response.
--- Set with communication data.
0 Without CR • LF
CR • LF
n11 1 With CR, without LF
selection
2 With CR • LF

119

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Computer programming>
(1) Communication protocol
Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the
following procedure:
Data read
Computer
(Data flow)
*2
Inverter 1) 4) 5)
Time
Inverter 2) 3)
*1
(Data flow)
Data write
Computer

REMARKS
*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation
with the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of
consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the
computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of
consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format


types
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
Run Running Parameter Inverter Monitor- Parame-
No. Operation
Command Frequency Write Reset ing ter Read
Communication request
is sent to the inverter in
1) accordance with the A' A (A")*1 A (A")*2 A B B
user program in the
computer.
Inverter data processing
2) Present Present Present Absent Present Present
time
Reply data No error*
E, E' E
from the (Request C C C Absent
(E")*1 (E")*2
inverter. accepted)
3)
(Data 1) is With error
checked for (request D D D Absent F F
error) rejected)
Computer processing
4) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
delay time
Answer from No error*
G G
computer in (No inverter Absent Absent Absent Absent
(Absent) (Absent)
response to processing)
5) reply data With error.
3). (Data 3) (Inverter
is checked Absent Absent Absent Absent H H
outputs 3)
for error) again.)
* In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or
more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 123.)
120

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


REMARKS
* 1. Setting any of "0.1" to "999" in Pr. 37 "speed display" and "1" in data code
"HFF" sets the data format to A" or E" (6-digit data).
Also, the output frequency turns to a speed display, which is valid in 0.01r/min
increments. (The third decimal place is invalid.)
If the data code "HFF" is other than "1", the display is in 1r/min increments and
a 4-digit data format can be used.
Reply data is given in format E if the requested monitor data has 4 digits, in
format E' if the data has 2 digits, or in format E" if the data has 6 digits.
* 2. The data format to read/write Pr. 37 "speed display" is always E"/A" (6-digit data).
(3) Data format
Data used is hexadecimal.
Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter.
Data format types
1) Communication request data from computer to inverter
[Data write]
Waiting

Inverter Instruction Sum


time

Format A *3 station code Data *4


ENQ number check
Number of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 characters
Waiting

Inverter
time *5

Format A' *3 station


Instruction
Data Sum *4
ENQ code check
number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Number of characters
Waiting

Inverter Instruction Sum


time

Format A" *3 station Data *4


ENQ code check
number Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 of
[Data read] characters
Waiting

*3 Inverter
time *5

Format B
Instruction
station code Sum *4
ENQ number check
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Number of characters
2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write
[No data error detected] [Data error detected]
*3 Inverter Inverter
*3 station Error
Format C station *4 Format D *4
ACK number NAK number code
Number Number
1 2 3 4 of 1 2 3 4 5 of
characters characters
3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read
[No data error detected] [Data error detected] 2

Format E *3 Inverter Read *3 Sum


station *4
STX number data ETX check
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Format F
Inverter
Format E' *3 Inverter Read *3 Sum *3 station Error
station *4 Number *4
STX number data ETX check NAK number code
of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 characters 1 2 3 4 5

Format E'' *3 Inverter Read *3 Sum


station *4
STX number data ETX check
Number of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 characters
121

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read
[No data error detected] [Data error detected]
(May be omitted)
Format G *3 Inverter Format H *3 Inverter
station *4 station *4
ACK number NAK number
Number Number
1 2 3 4 of 1 2 3 4 of
characters characters

REMARKS
• The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and
31) in hexadecimal.
• *3 indicates the control code.
• *4 indicates the CR or LF code.
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on
some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter
according to the computer.
Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using n11.
• At *5, when communication parameter n7 "waiting time setting" ≠ - - -, create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format.
(The number of characters is decremented by 1.)

(4) Data definitions


1) Control codes
Signal ASCII Code Description
STX H02 Start of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2) Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation, monitoring, given by the computer to
the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by
specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 177.)
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the
inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with
the instruction codes. (Refer to page 177.)

122

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the
computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance
with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments
(e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer
Inverter data processing time
Inverter = waiting time + data check time
Inverter (setting 10ms) (12ms)

Computer

REMARKS
When communication parameter n7 "waiting time setting" ≠‚ "- - -", create the
communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number
of characters is decremented by 1.)

6) Response time
Data sending time
(refer to the following calculation expression)

Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time


(set value 10ms) (12ms)
Computer
Inverter ACK ENQ
Inverter STX
10ms or 10ms or
Computer more required more required
Data sending time
(refer to the following calculation expression)
Data sending time
(refer to the following calculation expression)

Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time


(set value 10ms) (12ms)
Computer
Inverter ENQ
Inverter 10ms or
Computer more required

Data sending time


(refer to the following calculation expression)
[Data sending time calculation expression] 2
1
Number of data characters Communication specification
Communication speed (Total number of bits) = Data sending time (s)
(Refer to page 121)
(bps) (See below)
Communication specification
Name Number of Bits
1 bit
Stop bit length
2 bits
Data length 7 bits
8 bits
Yes 1 bit
Parity check
No 0 bits
In addition to the bits in the above table, 1 bit is required for the start bit.
Minimum total number of bits ... 9 bits
Maximum total number of bits ... 12 bits

123

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


7) Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte
(8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.

Instruction
number
E

Station
Sum

Waiting
code

time
(Example 1) N Data check
Computer Inverter Q code
0 1 E 1 1 0 7 A D F 4 Binary code
ASCII code H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

H H H H H H H H H
30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44
H
= 1F4
Sum
number

S E Sum
Station

(Example 2) T Read time T check


Inverter Computer X X code
0 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 Binary code
ASCII code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30

H H H H H H
30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30
H
= 130
Sum
8) Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to
the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 128.)
REMARKS
1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept that
data.
2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the
computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command, the
inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the program
to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.
3. When accessing the parameter settings, data for link parameter expansion
setting differs between the parameters as indicated below:
Instruction
Data
Code
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 can be accessed.
Read H7F H01: Calibration parameters C1 to C7 (Pr. 900 to
Link Pr. 905) and communication parameter n13
parameter (Pr. 145) can be accessed.
expansion H03: Communication parameters n1 to n12
setting Write HFF (Pr. 331 to Pr. 342) can be accessed.
H09: Communication parameters n14 to n17
(Pr. 990 to Pr. 993) can be accessed.

124

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


CAUTION
When the inverter's permissible communication time interval is not set,
interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when
the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled
during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter cannot be
stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter
will come to an alarm stop (OPT).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by
switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc, the
inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.

125

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start
communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
Number
of Data
Instruction Digits
No. Item Description (Data
Code
code
FF = 1)
H0000: Communication operation
Read H7B
Operation H0001: External operation
1 4 digits
mode H0000: Communication operation
Write HFB
H0001: External operation
H0000 to HFFFF:Output frequency (hexadecimal)
Output
in 0.01Hz increments 4 digits
frequency H6F
[Speed (hexadecimal) in r/min when Pr. 37 = "0.1 (6 digits)
[speed]
to 999"]
Output H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in
H70 4 digits
current 0.01A increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm definitions
Alarm definition display example (instruction code
H74)
b15 b8b7 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Monitoring

Previous alarm Most recent alarm


2 (H30) (HA0)
Alarm data
Alarm Data Description Data Description
H74 to H75 4 digits
definition H00 No alarm H40 FIN
H10 OC1 H60 OLT
H11 OC2 H80 GF
H12 OC3 H90 OHT
H20 OV1 HA0 OPT
H21 OV2 HB0 PE
H22 OV3 HB1 PUE
H30 THT HB2 RET
H31 THM HC0 CPU*
* Error code may not be returned.
b7 b0 b0 :
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 b1 : Forward
rotation (STF)
[For example 1] b2 : Reverse
[Example 1] H02 ... Forward rotation (STR)*
rotation b3 : Low speed (RL)*
3 Run command HFA [Example 2] H00 ... Stop 2 digits
b4 : Middle speed (RM)*
b5 : High speed (RH)*
b6 :
b7 :
* Function change can be made using Pr. 60 to
Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection).

126

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Number
of Data
Instruction Digits
No. Item Description
Code (Data
code
FF = 1)
b7 b0 b0: Inverter
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 running (RUN)*
b1: Forward rotation
[For example 1]
b2: Reverse rotation
[Example 1] H02 ... During b3: Up to
forward
frequency (SU)
Inverter status rotation
4 H7A [Example 2] H80 ... Stop due to
b4: Overload (OL) 2 digits
monitor b5:
alarm
b6: Frequency
detection (FU)
b7: Alarm occurrence*
* Function change can be made using Pr. 64 and
Pr. 65 (output terminal function selection).
Set frequency
H6E Reads the set frequency (RAM or E2PROM).
read (E2PROM) 4 digits
H0000 to H2EE0: 0.01Hz increments
Set frequency (6 digits)
H6D (hexadecimal)
read (RAM)
Set frequency H0000 to H2EE0: 0.01Hz increments
5
write (RAM and HEE (hexadecimal) (0 to 120.00Hz)*
E2PROM) To change the set frequency consecutively, write 4 digits
Set frequency data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED) (6 digits)
write HED * The minimum setting increments are 0.01Hz but
(RAM only) setting may be made in 0.1Hz increments only.
H9696: Resets the inverter.
As the inverter is reset on start of communication
6 Inverter reset HFD 4 digits
by the computer, the inverter cannot send reply
data back to the computer.
Alarm definition
7 HF4 H9696: Alarm history batch clear 4 digits
batch clear
All parameters return to the factory settings.
Any of four different all clear operations are
performed according to the data.
Pr. Commu- Calibra
Other HEC
nication -tion
Pr.* HFF
Data Pr. Pr.
H9696 2
All parameter
8 HFC H9966 4 digits
clear
H5A5A
H55AA
When all parameter clear is executed for H9696 or
H9966, communication-related parameter settings
also return to the factory settings. When resuming
operation, set the parameters again.
* Pr. 75 is not cleared.
H80 to
9 Parameter write
HFD Refer to the "Data Code List" (page 177) and write
4 digits
H00 to and/or read the values as required.
10 Parameter read
H7B

127

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Number
No. Item Instruction Description of Data
Code
Digits
H00 to H6C and H80 to HEC parameter values
are changed.
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 are accessible.
Link Read H7F H01: Communication parameter n13 (Pr. 145) and
parameter calibration parameters C1 to C7 (Pr. 900 to
11 Pr. 905) are accessible. 2 digits
expansion
setting H03: Communication parameters n1 to n12
(Pr. 331 to Pr. 342) are accessible.
Write HFF H09: Communication parameters n14 to n17
(Pr. 990 to Pr. 993) are accessible.
When setting the bias/gain (data codes H5E to
H61, HDE to HE1) parameters
Second Read H6C H00: Frequency (*1)
parameter H01: Analog
H02: Analog value of terminal (*2)
12 changing *1. The gain frequencies may also be written using 2 digits
(Code Pr. 38 and Pr. 39 (data codes A6 and A7).
HFF = 1) Write HEC *2. When a voltage is given to the external
terminal to make bias or gain calibration, the
data value written is 4 digits.
REMARKS
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, their set values are held once they are written,
but changed to 0 when the inverter is reset or all clear is performed.
<Error Code List>
The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in
any communication request data from the computer:
Error Inverter
Item Definition
Code Operation
The number of errors consecutively detected in
H0 Computer communication request data from the computer is
NAK error
greater than allowed number of retries. Brought to an
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity. alarm stop
Sum check The sum check code in the computer does not match (OPT) if error
H2 error that of the data received by the inverter. occurs
Data received by the inverter is in wrong protocol, data continuously
H3 Protocol more than the
receive is not completed within given time, or CR and
error allowable
LF are not as set in the parameter.
Framing number of
H4 The stop bit length is not as specified by initialization. retries.
error
Overrun New data has been sent by the computer before the
H5
error inverter completes receiving the preceding data.
H6 ——— ——— ———
Does not accept
H7 Character The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to received data but
error F, control code). is not brought to
alarm stop.
H8 ——— ——— ———
H9 ——— ——— ———
Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer
HA Mode error link operation mode or during inverter operation. Does not accept
received data
Instruction
HB The specified command does not exist. but is not
code error
brought to alarm
Data range Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, stop.
HC error frequency setting, etc.
HD ——— ——— ———
HE ——— ——— ———
HF ——— ——— ———
128

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(5) Operation at alarm occurrence
Operation Mode
Fault Location Description Communication
Operation External Operation
(RS-485 connector)
Inverter operation Stop Stop
Inverter fault RS-485
Communication Continued Continued
connector
Communication error Inverter operation Stop/continued (*3) Continued
(Communication from RS-485
Communication Stop Stop
RS-485 connector) connector
*3: Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop).
(6) Communication error
Error Message
Fault Location Remarks
(Operation panel)
Communication error
OPT Error code is OPT
(Communication from RS-485 connector)
(7) Program example
To change the operation mode to computer link operation
Program
Line number Initial setting of I/O file
10 OPEN"COM1:9600,E,8,2,HD"AS #1 Opening the communication file
20 COMST1,1,1:COMST1,2,1 ON/OFF setting of circuit control signals (RS, ER)
30 ON COM(1)GOSUB*REC Interrupt definition for data receive
40 COM(1)ON Interrupt enable
Send data setting
50 D$="01FB10000"
60 S=0 Sum code calculation
70 FOR I=1 TO LEN(D$)
80 A$=MID$(D$,I,1)
90 A=ASC(A$)
100 S=S+A
110 NEXT I
120 D$=CHR$(&H5)+D$+RIGHT$(HEX$(S),2) Addition of control and sum codes
130 PRINT#1,D$ Data send
Interrupt data receive
140 GOTO 50
Interrupt occurrence during data receive
1000 *REC
1010 IF LOC(1)=0 THEN RETURN
1020 PRINT"RECEIVE DATA" 2
1030 PRINT INPUT$(LOC(1),#1)
1040 RETURN
General flowchart
Line number
10 I/O file initial
to
setting
40

50 Send data processing 1000


Data setting Receive data processing
to Sum code calculation Interrupt to Data import
Screen display
Data send 1040
140

129

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.14.2 Operation and speed command write
Used to make valid the operation and speed commands from the computer or
external terminals.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Operation
n8 (338) 0 0, 1
command write
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
Speed command
n9 (339) 0 0, 1
write
The parameter numbers within parentheses are those for use of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04).
<Setting>
In the computer operation mode, commands from the external terminals and
sequence program are as listed below.
(Refer to page 88 for Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection).)
n8 (Pr. 338) "operation 0: 0: 1: 1:
Operation
command write" Computer Computer External External
location Remarks
n9 (Pr. 339) "speed 0: 1: 0: 1:
selection
command write" Computer External Computer External
Forward rotation command
Fixed Computer Computer External External
(STF)
function
Computer link operation
(Terminal- Computer — Computer —
frequency
equivalent
2 — External — External
function)
4 — External — External
Low-speed operation
0 Computer External Computer External Pr. 59 = "0"
command (RL)
Middle-speed operation
1 Computer External Computer External Pr. 59 = "0"
command (RM)
High-speed operation
2 Computer External Computer External Pr. 59 = "0"
command (RH)
Second function
3 Computer Computer External External
selection (RT)
Current input selection
Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 settings

4 — Either — Either
(AU)
Selection function

Start self-holding
5 — — External External
selection (STOP)
6 Output stop (MRS) Either Either External External Pr. 79 ≠ "7"
External thermal relay
7 External External External External
input (OH)
15-speed selection
8 Computer External Computer External Pr. 59 = "0"
(REX)
Jog operation selection
9 — — External External
(JOG)
10 Reset (RES) Either Either Either Either
PID control valid
14 Computer External Computer External
terminal (X14)
PU-external operation
16 External External External External
switch-over (X16)
Reverse rotation
--- Computer Computer External External
command (STR)

130

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


n8 (Pr. 338) "operation 0: 0: 1: 1:
Operation
command write" Computer Computer External External
location Remarks
n9 (Pr. 339) "speed 0: 1: 0: 1:
selection
command write" Computer External Computer External
RH, RM, Remote setting
Computer External Computer External
RL, REX (RH, RM, RL) Pr. 59 =
selection "1", "2"
15-speed selection (REX) — — — —
function
MRS
PU operation interlock
selection External External External External Pr. 79 = "7"
(MRS)
function

[Explanation of table]
External : Operation is valid only from external terminal signal.
Computer : Operation is valid only from sequence program.
Either : Operation is valid from either of external terminal and computer.
— : Operation is invalid from either of external terminal and computer.

CAUTION
When Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" is set to "7" (PU operation interlock function),
only the external terminal is made valid independently of the n8 and n9 settings
because the MRS terminal is shared.

2.14.3 Link start mode selection


You can choose the operation mode established at power-on or at power
restoration after instantaneous power failure.
Set "1" in n10 to select the computer link operation mode.
After a link start, parameter write is enabled with a program.

Factory Setting 2
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
Link start mode
n10 (340) 0 0, 1 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
selection
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

131

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


<Setting>
n10 Mode at Power-On or at Power Restoration
Operation Mode
Setting Pr. 79 after Instantaneous Power Failure
0 PU or external operation Placed in the external operation mode.
1 PU operation Placed in the PU operation mode.
2 External operation Placed in the external operation mode.
The running frequency is given in the PU
External/PU combined
3 operation mode and the start signal in the
operation mode
external operation mode.
The running frequency is given in the external
External/PU combined
4 operation mode and the start signal in the PU
operation mode
0 operation mode.
(Factory MRS signal ON .....Can be switched to PU
setting) operation mode.
(Output stop during
7 External operation mode
external operation)
MRS signal OFF ...Switching to PU operation
mode inhibited.
X16 signal ON .......Switched to external
External/PU combined operation mode.
8
operation mode X16 signal OFF .....Switched to PU operation
mode.
Disabled when PU is selected. Enabled when
0 Computer link operation
external is selected.
1 PU operation only Disabled
2 Computer link operation Enabled
External/PU combined
3 Disabled
operation
1
External/PU combined
4 Disabled
operation
External operation (PU Enabled only for external operation when the
7
operation interlock) PU interlock signal (MRS) is ON.
PU or external (signal
8 Enabled only for external operation (X16: ON).
switching)
n10 can be changed independently of the operation mode of the operation panel.
Setting of n10 = "1" is made valid when "0" or "2" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
Refer to to (page 118)

2.14.4 E2PROM write selection


2
You can choose whether the parameters are stored into E PROM or not at the
parameter setting for computer communication.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: Written to RAM and E2PROM
E2PROM write 1: Written to RAM only
n12 (342) 0 0, 1
selection Not written to E2PROM*
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
2
* When reset is performed, the parameter value will be the value of E PROM.
132

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.15 Parameter Unit (FR-PU04) Setting
When the optional parameter unit (FR-PU04) is connected to the RS-485 connector
of the inverter, you can make the environment setting of the parameter unit.

CAUTION
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, operation from the operation panel is
STOP
not accepted. (The stop key ( RESET key) is valid)

2.15.1 Parameter unit display language switching


By setting the communication parameter n13 "PU display language switching",
you can switch the display language of the parameter unit to another.

Factory
Setting Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
<NA, EC Range
version>
0
n13 (145) PU display language 0 to 7 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
<1>
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).

<Setting>
n13 Setting Display Language
0 Japanese
1 English
2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finish

2.15.2 Buzzer sound control 2


By setting the communication parameter n14 "PU buzzer sound control", you can
control "beep" produced when any of the parameter unit (FR-PU04) keys is
operated.

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
0: Without sound
PU buzzer sound
n14 (990) 1 0, 1 1: With sound (factory setting)
control
Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
133

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.15.3 PU contrast adjustment
By setting the communication parameter n15 "PU contrast adjustment", you can
adjust the LCD contact of the parameter unit (FR-PU04). When using the FR-
PU04, adjust the numerical value to any brightness with the / keys and
define that brightness with the WRITE key of the parameter unit.
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
n15 (991) PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
CAUTION
When using the FR-PU04, you should press the WRITE key to store the LCD
contrast setting.

2.15.4 PU main display screen data selection


You can choose the main display screen of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
PU main display
n16 (992) screen data 0 0, 100 Setting is enabled when Pr. 30 = "1"
selection

<Setting>
When you set 100 in n16, the monitor value changes depending on whether the
inverter is at a stop or running.
n16
0 100
During operation/stop During stop During operation
Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency
Output current Output current
Alarm display Alarm display

REMARKS
During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
During MRS, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.

♦Related parameters♦

Speed display ⇒ Pr. 37 "speed display" (refer to page 73)

134

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


2.15.5 PU disconnection detection/PU setting lock
You can choose the connector disconnection detection function of the parameter
unit (FR-PU04) and the operation write of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
PU disconnection detection : This function detects that the parameter unit
(FR-PU04) has been disconnected from the
inverter for longer than 1 second and causes
the inverter to provide an alarm output (PUE)
and come to an alarm stop. When the PU has
been disconnected since before power-on, it is
not judged as an alarm.
PU operation : Operation performed to perform running,
frequency setting or parameter setting from the
parameter unit (FR-PU04).

Factory Setting
Parameter Name Remarks
Setting Range
PU disconnection Setting is enabled when
n17 (993) 0 0, 1, 10
detection/PU setting lock Pr. 30 = "1"

<Setting>
n17 Setting PU Disconnection Detection PU Setting Lock
Operation is continued as-is if the PU is
0
disconnected (without PU disconnection detection)
PU operation valid
Inverter output is shut off when the PU is
1
disconnected (with PU disconnection detection)
Operation is continued as-is if the PU is
10 PU operation invalid*
disconnected (without PU disconnection detection)
STOP
* The monitor display and RESET key are valid.

REMARKS
When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the RS-485
connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function is valid but the PU 2
disconnection detection function is invalid.

CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter while the start signal is being input.
Doing so will cause the inverter to start immediately after a reset, leading to
hazardous conditions.

135

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.
PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

3.1 Errors (Alarms) ................................................... 137


3.2 Troubleshooting .................................................. 146
3.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection....... 149

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter33

Chapter 4

136

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.1 Errors (Alarms)
If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is
activated to bring the inverter to an alarm stop and automatically give the
corresponding error (alarm) indication on the PU display.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other
problem, please contact your sales representative.
Retention of alarm output signal......When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on
the power supply side of the inverter is opened
at the activation of the protective function, the
inverter's control power will be lost and the
alarm output will not be held.
Alarm indication...............................When the protective function is activated, the
operation panel display automatically switches
to the above indication.
Resetting method ............................When the protective function is activated, the
inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. Switch
power off once, then on again; power off once,
then on again; or apply RES signal for more
than 0.1 second. Kept on, "Err." appears
(flickers) to indicate that the inverter is being
reset.
When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action,
then reset the inverter, and resume operation.

3.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions


(1) Major failures
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and the alarm
is output.
Operation Panel Indication OC1 FR-PU04 OC During Acc
Name Overcurrent cut-off during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during
Description
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter
output.
Check for sudden acceleration.
Check point
Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Corrective action Increase the acceleration time.

137

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Operation Panel Indication OC2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OC
Name Overcurrent cut-off during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during constant-
Description
speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the
inverter output.
Check for sudden load change.
Check point
Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Corrective action Keep load stable.

Operation Panel Indication OC3 FR-PU04 OC During Dec


Name Overcurrent cut-off during deceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during
Description
deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Check for too fast operation of motor's mechanical brake.
Increase the deceleration time.
Corrective action
Adjust brake operation.

Operation Panel Indication OV1 FR-PU04 OV During Acc


Name Regenerative overvoltage cut-off during acceleration
When the main circuit DC voltage in the inverter rises to or above
the specified value due to excessive regenerative energy during
Description acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter
output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage
produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration.
Decrease the acceleration time.
Corrective action
Install a power factor improving reactor.

Operation Panel Indication OV2 FR-PU04 Stedy Spd OV


Name Regenerative overvoltage cut-off during constant speed
When the main circuit DC voltage in the inverter rises to or above
the specified value due to excessive regenerative energy during
Description constant speed, the protective circuit is activated to stop the 3
inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge
voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden load change.
Keep load stable.
Corrective action
Install a power factor improving reactor.

138

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Operation Panel Indication OV3 FR-PU04 OV During Dec
Name Regenerative overvoltage cut-off during deceleration or stop
When the main circuit DC voltage in the inverter rises to or above
the specified value due to excessive regenerative energy during
Description deceleration or stop, the protective circuit is activated to stop the
inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge
voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which
matches the inertia moment of the load)
Corrective action
Decrease the braking duty.
Install a power factor improving reactor.

Operation Panel Indication THM FR-PU04 Motor Overload


Motor overload cut-off (electronic thermal overcurrent protection)
Name
(* 1)
The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects motor
overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during low-
speed operation to stop the inverter output. When a multi-pole
Description
motor or two or more motors are run, provide a thermal relay in
the output side of the inverter.
Protection from burning due to motor temperature rise
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
Reduce the load weight.
Corrective action For the constant-torque motor, change the Pr. 71 setting to the
constant-torque motor setting.

Operation Panel Indication THT FR-PU04 Inv. Overload


Inverter overload cut-off (electronic thermal overcurrent protection)
Name
(* 1)
If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current flows
and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less), inverse-
time characteristics cause the electronic overcurrent protection to
Description
be activated to stop the inverter output in order to protect the
output transistors.
Output transistor protection from overheat
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
*1. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the
electronic overcurrent protection.

Operation Panel Indication FIN FR-PU04 H/Sink O/Temp


Name Fin overheat
If the cooling fin overheats, the overheat sensor is actuated to
Description
stop the inverter output.
Check for too high ambient temperature.
Check point
Check for cooling fin clogging.
Corrective action Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.

139

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Operation Panel Indication GF FR-PU04 Ground Fault
Name Start-time output side ground fault overcurrent protection
This function stops the inverter output if a ground fault overcurrent
flows due to a ground fault which occurred in the inverter's output
Description
(load) side. Made valid when Pr. 40 "start-time ground fault
detection selection" = "1".
Check point Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the ground fault portion.

Operation Panel Indication OHT FR-PU04 OH Fault


Name External thermal relay (*2)
If the external thermal relay designed for motor overheat
protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the
Description motor switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not
restart unless it is reset.
Check for motor overheating.
Check point Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of
Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection).
Corrective action Reduce the load and operating duty.
*2. Functions only when any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection) is
set to OH.

Operation Panel Indication OLT FR-PU04 Stll Prev STP


Name Stall prevention (overload)
The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention
Description operation activated. OL appears while stall prevention is being
activated.
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

Operation Panel Indication OPT FR-PU04 Option Fault


Name Communication error (*3)
Stops the inverter output if a setting error or connection
Description (connector) fault occurs during use of the RS-485 communication
function.
Check point Check that the connector is plugged securely.
Make connection securely.
Corrective action
Please contact your sales representative.
3
Operation Panel Indication PE FR-PU04 Corrupt Memory
Name Parameter error
A fault occurred in parameters stored
Description
(example: E2PROM fault).
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.

140

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Operation Panel Indication PUE FR-PU04 PU Leave Out
Name PU disconnected (*3)
Stops the inverter output if communication between inverter and
PU is suspended, e.g. if the PU is disconnected with "1" set in the
Description
communication parameter n17 "PU disconnection detection/PU
setting lock".
Check that the FR-PU04 is fitted securely.
Check point Check the setting of the communication parameter n17 "PU
disconnection detection".
Corrective action Fit the FR-PU04 securely.
*3. For only the type having the RS-485 communication function.

Operation Panel Indication RET FR-PU04 Retry No Over


Name Retry count
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of
Description
retries set, this function stops the inverter output.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.

Operation Panel Indication CPU FR-PU04 CPU Fault


Name CPU error
If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end within
Description a predetermined period, the inverter self-determines it as an
alarm and stops the output.
Check point 
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.

(2) Minor failures


When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. You can make
parameter setting to output the light fault signal. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 64, Pr. 65
(output terminal function selection). Refer to page 90)
Operation Panel Indication FN FR-PU04 FN
Name Fan trouble
For the inverter which contains a cooling fan, appears on the
operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or
Description
operates differently from the setting of Pr. 76 "cooling fan
operation selection".
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Corrective action Change the fan.

141

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(3) Warnings
Operation Panel Indication OL FR-PU04 OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
If a current of more than 150% (* 4) of the rated
inverter current flows in the motor, this function
stops the increase in frequency until the overload
During
current reduces to prevent the inverter from
acceleration
resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the
overload current has reduced below 150%, this
function increases the frequency again.
If a current of more than 150% (* 4) of the rated
inverter current flows in the motor, this function
During
lowers the frequency until the overload current
constant-
Description reduces to prevent overcurrent shut-off. When the
speed
overload current has reduced below 150%, this
operation
function increases the frequency up to the set
value.
If a current of more than 150% (* 4) of the rated
inverter current flows in the motor, this function
stops the decrease in frequency until the overload
During
current reduces to prevent the inverter from
deceleration
resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the
overload current has reduced below 150%, this
function decreases the frequency again.
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
The acceleration/deceleration time may change.
Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 "stall
prevention operation level", or disable stall prevention with
Corrective action
Pr. 21 "stall prevention function selection".
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0) setting is not higher than
required.
*4. The stall prevention operation current can be set as desired. It is factory-set to
150%.

Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04 oL


Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
If the regenerative energy of the motor increases
too much to exceed the brake capability, this
During
Description function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent
deceleration
overvoltage shut-off. As soon as the regenerative
3
energy has reduced, deceleration resumes.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration
Corrective action
time using Pr. 8 "deceleration time".

142

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Operation Panel Indication PS FR-PU04 PS
Name PU stop (Stopped with PU STOP key)
Pr. 75 "reset selection/PU stop selection" had been set and a stop
STOP
was made by pressing the RESET key of the operation panel or
Description
parameter unit (FR-PU04) during operation in the external
operation mode.
STOP
Check for a stop made by pressing the RESET key of the
Check point
operation panel during external operation.
Corrective action Refer to page 94.

Operation Panel Indication UV


Name Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter reduces, the control
circuit will not operate properly and will result in decreased motor
torque or increased heat generation. To prevent this, if the power
Description supply voltage reduces below about 115VAC (about 230VAC for
the three-phase 400V power input series, about 58VAC for the
single-phase 100V power input series), this function stops the
inverter output.
Check for a start of large-capacity motor.
Check point Check that the power supply capacity is as indicated in the
specifications (refer to page 161).
Check the power supply system equipment such as the power
Corrective action
supply.

(4) Write errors


Operation Panel Indication Er1 FR-PU04 Control Mode
Name Write disable error
Write was performed with "1" (write disable) set in Pr. 77
"parameter write disable selection".
Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
Description
Parameter write was performed though the operation panel does
not have the write precedence. (Only the type having RS-485
communication function)
Check the setting of Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
(Refer to page 97)
Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to
page 72)
Corrective action
When the FR-PU04 is fitted and n17 = "0" or "1", the operation
of the operation panel is invalid.
For RS-485 connector (RS-485) communication, the operation
of the operation panel is invalid.

143

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


In PU/EXT Mode
Operation Panel Indication Er2 FR-PU04
OPERATOR ERR
Name Write-while-running error/mode designation error
Write was performed during operation.
An attempt was made to change the Pr. 79 setting to the
Description
operation mode where the operation command has been input.
Write was performed in the external operation mode.
After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Corrective action After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode",
make parameter setting. (Refer to page 98)

Operation Panel Indication Er3 FR-PU04 Incr I/P


Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions).
Corrective action
(Refer to page 74)

144

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm
(Only when FR-PU04 is used)
When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of
the corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the MON key at this point
without resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, it is
possible to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. It is also
possible to know the current in the same manner. After resetting, you can confirm the
definitions in "Alarm History". (For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
parameter unit (FR-PU04).)

3.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters


There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters
and the digital characters displayed on the control panel:
Actual Display Actual Display Actual Display

A M
0
B N
1
C O
2
D o
3
E P
4
F S
5
G T
6
H U
7
I V
8
J r
9
L -

3.1.4 Resetting the inverter


The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the
electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of
retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
STOP
Operation 1:...... Using the control panel, press the RESET key to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when the inverter protective function
(major failure) is activated.)
Operation 2:...... Cut (off) power once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3:...... Switch on the reset signal (RES).
(Assign this signal to any of Pr. 60 to Pr. 63.) (Refer to page 40, 88)
145

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.2 Troubleshooting
POINTS
Check the corresponding areas. If the cause is still unknown, it is recommended to
initialize the parameters (return to factory settings), re-set the required parameter
values, and check again.

3.2.1 Motor remains stopped


1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel
display is provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the connector across P1-P<+> is connected.

2) Check the input signals


Check that the start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not
input.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero.
Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to
20mA.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
(Assign signals MRS and RES using Pr. 60 to Pr. 63 (input terminal
function selection).)
Check that the sink or source connector is fitted securely.

3) Check the parameter settings


Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected.
Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (C2 to C7) settings are correct.
Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the
running frequency.
Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation),
especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.

4) Check the load


Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked. 3
5) Others
Check that the operation panel display does not show an error (e.g. OC1).
Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13
"starting frequency" value.

146

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction
Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are
connected properly.
Check the setting of Pr. 17 "RUN key rotation direction selection".

3.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting


Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal
level.)
Check that the following parameter settings are correct (Pr. 1, Pr. 2,
Pr. 19, Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 95, C2 to C7).
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use
shielded cables)
Check that the load is not too heavy.

3.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth


Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall
prevention function.

3.2.5 Motor current is large


Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large.

3.2.6 Speed does not increase


Check that the maximum frequency setting is correct.
Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become
heavier in winter.)
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall
prevention function.

3.2.7 Speed varies during operation


When slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies with load
fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Inspection of input signal
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise.
Check for a malfunction due to an undesirable current when the transistor
output unit is connected. (Refer to page 25)
3) Others
Check that the wiring is within specified length.
Check that the inverter is either FR-S540-1.5K, 2.2K or 3.7K and GD2
load is samll (at the mnitor GD2 or smaller)
If so, set the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" to 6kHz or higher. When setting
the PWM to a higher frequency, check for noise or leakage current problem and
take countermeasures against it.
147

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
1. External input signal ......... Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be
changed.
2. Parameter setting ............. Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
setting is "0", switching input power on
places the inverter in the external operation
PU
mode. Press the EXT key to switch to the
PU operation mode.
For other settings (1 to 8), the operation
mode is limited accordingly.
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 98.)

3.2.9 Operation panel display is not operating


Make sure that terminals PC-SD are not shorted.
Make sure that the connector is fitted securely across terminals P<+>-P1.

3.2.10 Parameter write cannot be performed


Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not
ON).
Check that the SET key ( WRITE key) was pressed.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter outside the
setting range.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external
operation mode.
Check Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".

3.2.11 Motor produces annoying sound


Check the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" setting.
Make sure that the deceleration time is not too short.

148

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily
inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse
influence of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.

3.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection


For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the
smoothing capacitor. Therefore, when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after
power-off, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P-N of the
inverter is 30VDC or less using a meter, etc. Then, access the inverter for inspection.

3.3.2 Check items


(1) Daily inspection
• Check the following:
1) Motor operation fault
2) Improper installation environment
3) Cooling system fault
4) Unusual vibration and noise
5) Unusual overheating and discoloration
• During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a meter.
(2) Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean state.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in
neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will
cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.

3.3.3 Periodic inspection


Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
1) Cooling system:..........Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Screws and bolts: .......These parts may become loose due to vibration,
temperature changes, etc. Check that they are tightened
securely and retighten as necessary.
3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage.
4) Insulation resistance: Measure.
5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, relay: Check and change if necessary.

149

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger
1) Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external
circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test
voltage is not applied to the inverter.
2) For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a meter (high resistance range) and
do not use the megger or buzzer.
3) For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as
shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC
megger.)
Motor
R Inverter U
Power supply S V IM
T W

500VDC
megger

Earth terminal

3.3.5 Pressure test


Do not conduct a pressure test. The inverter may be deteriorated.

3.3.6 Daily and periodic inspection


Interval
Inspection
Area of

Periodic*
Inspection
Daily

Description Method Criterion Instrument


2 years
1 year

Item

Make Ambient Thermo-


measurement temperature: meter,
5cm (1.97inches) -10ºC to +50ºC hygrometer,
Check ambient
away from (14ºF to 122ºF), recorder
Surrounding temperature,
inverter. non-freezing.
environment humidity, dust,
Ambient
dirt, etc.
humidity: 90%
or less, non-
General

condensing.
Check for Visual and No fault.
unusual auditory checks.
Overall unit
vibration and
noise.
3
Measure voltage Within Meter, digital
across inverter permissible AC multimeter
Power Check that main
terminals R-S-T (DC) voltage
supply circuit voltage is
fluctuation
voltage normal.
(Refer to page
161)

150

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Interval
Inspection
Area of

Periodic*
Inspection

Daily
Description Method Criterion Instrument

2 years
1 year
Item

(1) Check with (1) Disconnect (1) 5MΩ or 500VDC


megger all cables more. class
(across from inverter (2), (3) No megger
main circuit and measure fault.
terminals across
and ground terminals R,
General

terminal). S, T, U, V, W
General
(2) Check for and ground
loose screws terminal with
and bolts. megger.
(3) Check for (2) Retighten.
overheat on (3) Visual check.
each part.
(4) Clean.
(1) Check (1), (2) Visual (1), (2) No fault.
conductors check.
Conductors, for distortion.
cables (2) Check cable
sheaths for
breakage.
Terminal Check for
Visual check No fault
block damage.
Disconnect
cables from
inverter and
Inverter Check measure across
module resistance terminals R, S, Refer to page Analog
Converter across T↔P, N, and 153. meter
module terminals. across U, V,
W↔P, N with a
Main circuit

meter with a
100Ω range.
(1) Check for (1), (2) Visual (1), (2) No fault. Capacity
liquid check. (3) 85% or meter
leakage. (3) Measure with more of
(2) Check for capacity rated
Smoothing safety valve meter. capacity.
capacitor projection
and bulge.
(3) Measure
electrostatic
capacity.
(1) Check for (1) Auditory (1) No fault.
chatter check. (2) No fault.
during (2) Visual check.
operation.
Relay
(2) Check for
rough
surface on
contacts.

151

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Interval
Inspection
Area of

Periodic*
Inspection

Daily
Description Method Criterion Instrument

2 years
1 year
Item

(1) Check (1) Measure (1) Phase-to- Digital


balance of voltage phase multimeter,
output across voltage rectifier type
voltages inverter balance voltmeter
across output within 4V
phases with terminals U- (8V) for
Protective circuit

inverter V-W. 200V


Control circuit

operated (2) Simulate (400V).


independently. connection of (2) Fault must
Operation
(2) Perform inverter occur
check sequence protective because of
protective circuit output sequence.
operation terminals.
test to make
sure there is
no fault in
protective or
display
circuits.
(1) Check for (1) Turn by hand No unusual
Cooling system

unusual with power vibration and


Cooling vibration and off. unusual noise.
noise. (2) Visual check.
fan
(2) Check for
loose
connection.
(1) Check for (1) Lamps (1) Check that
LED lamp indicate lamps are
blown. indicator lit.
Display lamps on
Display

panel.
(2) Clean. (2) Clean with
rag.
Check that Must satisfy Voltmeter,
reading is Check reading of specified and
Meter ammeter,
normal. meters on panel. management
values. etc.
(1) Check for (1) Auditory, (1), (2) No fault.
unusual sensory,
vibration visual
and noise. checks.
General (2) Check for (2) Check for
unusual unusual odor
odor. due to
Motor

overheat,
damage, etc.
(1) Check with (1) Disconnect 5MΩ or more. 500V
3
megger cables from megger
Insulation (across U, V, W
resistance terminals (including
and ground motor cables).
terminal).
Note: The value for the 400V class is indicated in the parentheses.
* For periodic inspection, contact you nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
152

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Checking the inverter and converter modules
<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R, S, T) and motor cables (U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a meter. (Use 100Ω range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the meter alternately at the inverter terminals R, S,
T, U, V, W, P and N, and check for continuity.
CAUTION
Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten's-of ohms
depending on the number of modules, number of parallel modules, circuit tester
type, etc. If all measured values are almost the same, the modules are without
fault.

<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>


Tester Polarity Measured Tester Polarity Measured
Value Value
R P Discontinuity R N Continuity
D1 D4
Converter

P R Continuity N R Discontinuity
module

S P Discontinuity S N Continuity
D2 D5
P S Continuity N S Discontinuity
T P Discontinuity T N Continuity
D3 D6
P T Continuity N T Discontinuity
U P Discontinuity U N Continuity
TR1 TR4
P U Continuity N U Discontinuity
Inverter
module

V P Discontinuity V N Continuity
TR3 TR6
P V Continuity N V Discontinuity
W P Discontinuity W N Continuity
TR5 TR2
P W Continuity N W Discontinuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
Converter
P
module Inverter module
TR1 TR3 TR5
D1 D2 D3

R C U

S V

T W

D4 D5 D6
TR4 TR6 TR2
N

REMARKS
The FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K and FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K do not have T, D3 and D6.
153

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.3.7 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structural or physical
characteristics, leading to reduced performance and/or failure of the inverter. For
preventive maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically.
Standard Replacement
Part Name Description
Interval
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Change (as required)
Smoothing capacitor in main circuit 5 years Change (as required)
Smoothing capacitor on control board 5 years Change the board (as required).
Relays ——— Change as required

CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.

(1) Cooling fan


The cooling fan used to cool heat-generating parts such as the main circuit
semiconductors has a bearing whose life is said to be 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence,
the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously.
When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must
be changed immediately.
Inverter Model No. Fan Type
FR-S520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
MMF-06D24DS BKO-C2416H07
FR-S520S-1.5K
FR-S540-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K MMF-06D24ES-FC4 BKO-CA1027H09

154

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Removal
1) Remove the front cover and wiring
cover. (Refer to the instruction
manual (basic).)
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is connected with
the cooling fan connector on the
side of the inverter terminal block.
Unplug the connector to disconnect AIR FLOW
the inverter and cooling fan.
3) Remove the cooling fan cover.
Remove the cover by disengaging
the fixing catches indicated by the
arrows.

4) Remove the cooling fan and cooling fan cover.


The cooling fan is secured by the fixing catches.
Disengaging the fixing catches removes the cooling fan and cooling fan cover.
Reinstallation
1) After confirming the orientation of
the fan, reinstall the fan to the cover
so that the arrow on the left of "AIR
FLOW" faces in the opposite
direction of the fan cover.

CAUTION
If the air flow is set in the wrong
direction, the inverter life can be shorter.

2) Reinstall the fan cover to the inverter.


Run the cable through the wiring
groove to prevent it from being caught
between the chassis and cover.
3) Reconnect the cable to the connector.
4) Reinstall the wiring cover.

155

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the
main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the
control power in the control circuit.
Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is
operated in an ordinary, air-conditioned environment, change the capacitors about
every 5 years. When 5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more
rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if the life will be
expired soon). Check the following:
1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion)
2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warp and extreme crack)
3) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage.
When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 85% of the
rating, change the capacitor.

(3) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be changed according to the number of
accumulative switching times (switching life).

156

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


3.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
Measurement of voltages and currents
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides
include harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and
circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure
the following circuits using the instruments given on the next page.
Three-phase 200V
power input
Three-phase 400V
power input

Input Output
voltage voltage

Input Output
current current

Single-phase 200V
power input
Single-phase 100V
power input

Inverter

Ar W11 R U Au W21
Vr Vu
3-phase
As W12 S V Av To motor
power supply
Vs Vv
At W13 T W Aw W22
Vt Vw
P N
The FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K :Moving-iron type
and FR-S510W-0.1K to
0.75K do not have As, At, :Electrodynamometer type
Vt, Vs, W12 and W13. V
+ - :Moving-coil type
Instrument
types :Rectifier type

Typical Measuring Points and Instruments


CAUTION
Use FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) to measure the output voltage accurately.
It cannot be measured accurately with a meter or general instrument.

157

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Measuring Points and Instruments
Measuring Remarks
Item Measuring Point
Instrument (Reference Measured Value)
Is the commercial power supply
Power supply
Across R-S, S-T Moving-iron type within permissible variation of AC
voltage
and T-R AC voltmeter voltage
(V1)
(Refer to page 161)
Power supply side
R, S and T line Moving-iron type
current
currents AC ammeter
(I1)
Power supply side At R, S and T, and Electrodynamic
P1 = W11 + W12 + W13
power across R-S, S-T type single-phase
(3-wattmeter method)
(P1) and T-R wattmeter
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current
Power supply side and power supply side power.
power factor [For three-phase power supply] [For single-phase power supply]
(Pf1) P1 P1
Pf1= 100% Pf1= 100%
3V1 I1 V1 I1
Rectifier type AC
voltmeter (Note 1) Difference between phases is
Output side voltage Across U-V, V-W
(Cannot be within ±1% of maximum output
(V2) and W-U
measured by voltage.
moving-iron type)
Current should be equal to or
Moving-iron type
Output side current U, V and W line less than rated inverter current.
AC ammeter
(I2) currents Difference between phases is
(Note 2)
10% or lower.
At U, V and W, and Electrodynamic P2 = W21 + W22
Output side power
across U-V and V- type single-phase 2-wattmeter method (or 3-
(P2)
W wattmeter wattmeter method)
Output side power Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
factor P2
Pf2= 100%
(Pf2) 3V2 I2
Moving-coil type Inverter LED display is lit.
Converter output Across P-N
(such as a meter) 1.35 × V1
Across 2 (+)-5 Moving-coil type 0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC
common.

(Meter, etc. may be


"5" is

Frequency setting
used)
signal Across 4 (+)-5 4 to 20mADC
(Internal resistance:
50kΩ or larger)

158

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Measuring Remarks
Item Measuring Point
Instrument (Reference Measured Value)

common.
"5" is
Frequency setting
Across 10 (+)-5 5VDC
power supply

Approximately 5VDC at
maximum frequency
(without frequency meter)
T1

SD is common.
Moving-coil type
(Meter, etc. may be
used) 8VDC
Across FM (+)-SD
Frequency meter (Internal resistance:
50kΩ or larger)
T2
signal Pulse width T1:
Adjusted with C1
Pulse cycle T2:
Set with Pr. 55 (Pr,56)

common.
Approximately 5VDC at

5 is
Across AM (+)-5 maximum frequency
(without frequency meter)
Moving-coil type

common.
Across STF, STR, (Meter, etc. may be 20 to 30VDC when open.

SD is
Start signal
RH, RM, RL, MRS, used) ON voltage: 1V or less
Select signal
RES-SD (Internal resistance: SD is common.
50kΩ or larger)
Continuity check
<Normal> <Fault>
Across A-C Moving-coil type Across
Alarm signal Discontinuity Continuity
Across B-C (such as a meter) A-C:
Across
Continuity Discontinuity
B-C:

CAUTION
1. Use FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. It can not be measured
accurately with a meter or general instrumentation.
2. When the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use the instrument because
overcurrent losses occurring in the metallic parts inside the instrument will
increase and may lead to burnout.
In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument.

159

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


4. SPECIFI-
CATIONS
This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment

4.1 Specification List .................................................. 161


4.2 Outline drawings .................................................. 167

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter44

160

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


4.1 Specification List
4.1.1 Ratings
(1) 3-phase 200V power supply
Japanese version
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K (-R) (-C)
NA version
FR-S520-0.1K to 3.7K-NA
Type FR-S520- K(-R) (-C) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Applicable motor capacity kW 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
(*1) HP 1/8 1/4 1/2 1 2 3 5
Rated capacity (kVA) (*2) 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.8 4.0 6.6
Output

Rated current (A) 0.8 1.4 2.5 4.1 7.0 10 16.5


Overload capacity (*3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (Inverse time characteristics)
Voltage (*4) Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC (DC) voltage,
Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply

Permissible AC (DC) voltage


170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system
0.4 0.7 1.2 2.1 4.0 5.5 9
capacity (kVA) (*5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20), IP40 for dirt-protection structure series
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
0.5 0.5 0.8 0.9 1.5 1.5 2.1
Approximate weight (kg (lbs))
(1.1) (1.1) (1.76) (1.98) (3.3) (3.3) (4.62)
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
*3. The % value of the overload capacity indicates the ratio of the overload current
to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
*4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply
voltage. However, the PWM pulse voltage value of the inverter output side
voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).

161

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) 3-phase 400V power supply
Japanese version
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K (-R)
NA version
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-NA (R)
EC version
FR-S540-0.4K to 3.7K-EC (R)
Type FR-S540- K(-R) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Applicable motor capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
(*1) HP 1/2 1 2 3 5
Rated capacity (kVA) (*2) 0.9 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.9
Output

Rated current (A) 1.1 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.7


Overload capacity (*3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (Inverse time characteristics)
Voltage (*4) Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC (DC) voltage,
Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply

Permissible AC (DC) voltage


325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system
1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.5
capacity (kVA) (*5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.7
Approximate weight (kg (lbs))
(3.3) (3.3) (3.3) (3.53) (3.75)
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
*3. The % value of the overload capacity indicates the ratio of the overload current
to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
*4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply
voltage. However, the PWM pulse voltage value of the inverter output side
voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).

162

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(3) Single-phase 200V power supply
Japanese version
FR-S520S-0.1K to 1.5K (-R)
EC version
FR-S520S-0.2K to 1.5K-EC (R)
Type FR-S520S- K(-R) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5
Applicable motor capacity kW 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5
(*1) HP 1/8 1/4 1/2 1 2
Rated capacity (kVA) (*2) 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.8
Output

Rated current (A) 0.8 1.4 2.5 4.1 7.0


Overload capacity (*3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (Inverse time characteristics)
Voltage (*4) Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC (DC) voltage,
Single-phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply

Permissible AC (DC) voltage


170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system
0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5 4.4
capacity (kVA) (*5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Forced air
Cooling system Self-cooling
cooling
0.5 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5
Approximate weight (kg (lbs))
(1.1) (1.32) (1.76) (2.2) (3.3)
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
*3. The % value of the overload capacity indicates the ratio of the overload current
to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
*4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply
voltage. However, the PWM pulse voltage value of the inverter output side
voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
*5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).

163

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(4) Single-phase 100V power supply
Japanese version
FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K (-R)
NA version
FR-S510W-0.1K to 0.75K-NA
Type FR-S510W- K(-R) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
Applicable motor capacity kW 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
(*1) HP 1/8 1/4 1/2 1
Rated capacity (kVA) (*2) 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.6
Output

Rated current (A) 0.8 1.4 2.5 4.1


Overload capacity (*3) 150% 60s 200% 0.5s (Inverse time characteristics)
Voltage Three phase, 200V to 230V 50Hz/60Hz (*4, 6)
Rated input AC (DC) voltage,
Single-phase, 100V to 115V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Power supply

Permissible AC (DC) voltage


90 to 132V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system
0.5 0.9 1.5 2.5
capacity (kVA) (*5)
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Self-cooling
0.6 0.7 0.9 1.6
Approximate weight (kg (lbs))
(1.32) (1.54) (1.98) (3.52)
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
*3. The % value of the overload capacity indicates the ratio of the overload current
to the inverter's rated output current.
For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter to return to or below the
temperatures under 100% load.
*4. For single-phase 100V power input, the output voltage provided cannot be
twice or more than the power supply voltage.
*5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*6. For single-phase 100V power input, the application of motor load reduces the
output voltage about 10 to 15%. Therefore, the load must be reduced when a
general-purpose motor is used.

164

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


4.1.2 Common specifications
Selectable between Soft-PWM control and high carrier
Control method frequency PWM control, V/F control or automatic torque
boost control selectable.
0.5 to 120Hz (starting frequency variable between 0 and
Output frequency range
60Hz)
5VDC input: 1/500 of max. set frequency, 10V, 4 to
Frequency setting resolution 20mADC input: 1/1000 of max. set frequency. Digital input:
0.1Hz (less than 100Hz), 1Hz (100Hz or higher)
Analog input: Within ±1% of max. output frequency
(25ºC±10ºC (77ºF±18ºF))
Frequency accuracy
Digital input: Within ±0.5% of set output frequency (when
setting dial is used)
Starting torque 150% (at 6Hz) during automatic torque boost control
0, 0.1 to 999s (may be set individually for acceleration and
Acceleration/deceleration
deceleration), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
time setting
mode selectable.
0.1K, 0.2K ... 150%, 0.4K, 0.75K ... 100%, 1.5K ... 50%,
Regenerative
Braking 2.2K, 3.7K ... 20%,
torque (*2) Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s),
Control specifications

DC braking
operation voltage (0 to 15%)
Frequency Analog input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mA
setting
Digital input Entered from control panel.
signal
Forward and reverse rotation, start signal
Start
STF, STR automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can
signal
be selected.
Used to reset alarm output provided when
Alarm reset
protective function is activated.
Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed
can be set between 0 and 120Hz, running
Multi-speed selection
speed can be changed during operation from
Input signals

the control panel.)


Used to select second functions (acceleration
Use
Second function selection time, deceleration time, torque boost, base
Pr. 60 to
frequency, electronic overcurrent protection).
Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output Pr. 63 for
Output stop selection.
(frequency, voltage).
Used to select input of frequency setting signal
Current input selection
4 to 20mADC (terminal 4).
External thermal relay Thermal relay contact input for use when the
input inverter is stopped by the external thermal relay.
Jog signal Jog operation mode selection
PID control valid Selection for exercising PID control
PU operation-external Used to switch between PU operation and
operation switching external operation from outside the inverter.

165

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Maximum and minimum frequency setting, frequency jump
operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse
Operation functions
rotation prevention, slip compensation, operation mode
selection, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)
(*3)
Control specifications

1 open collector signal can be selected from


among inverter running, up-to-frequency,
frequency detection, overload warning, zero Use
current detection, output current detection, PID Pr. 64 to
Running status
upper limit, PID lower limit, PID forward/reverse Pr. 65 for
Output signals

rotation, operation ready, minor failure and selection.


alarm. 1 contact output (1 contact, 230V 0.3A
AC, 30V 0.3A DC) signal can be selected.
1 signal can be selected from output frequency and motor
Japanese current.
Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s, 1mA full scale)
For meter
1 signal can be selected from output frequency and motor
NA, EC current.
Analog output (0 to 5VDC, 1mA full scale)
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration,
constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off (during
acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), overload shut-
off (electronic overcurrent protection), fin overheat, fan
Protective/alarm functions
failure (*4), stall prevention, start-time output side ground
fault protection (*5), external thermal relay (*6), PU
disconnection (*3), retry count excess, communication
error (*3), CPU error, undervoltage (*1)
-10ºC to +50ºC (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing) (-10°C to
Ambient temperature
+40°C (14°F to 104°F) for totally enclosed structure feature)
Environment

Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum. (non-condensing)


Storage temperature -20ºC to +65ºC (-4°F to 149°F)
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist,
Ambience
dust and dirt etc.)
Maximum 1000m (3280.80feet) above sea level for standard
Altitude, vibration operation.
5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C 0040)
*1. When undervoltage or instantaneous power failure occurs, no alarm output is
provided but the output is shut off. After power restoration, the inverter may be
run as it is. Depending on the running status (e.g. load magnitude), however,
overcurrent, regenerative overvoltage or other protection may be activated at
power restoration. (In external operation mode.)
*2. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies
with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is
decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce.
*3. This function is valid for only the type with RS-485 communication function.
*4. Compatible with only the product having the built-in cooling fan.
*5. Activated only when "1" is set in Pr. 40 "start-time ground fault detection
selection".
*6. Activated only when external thermal relay input (OH) is selected in any of Pr. 60
4
to Pr. 63 (input terminal function selection).

166

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


4.2 Outline Drawings
(Remarks) For the dimensions of the type having RS-485 communication function and
the totally enclosed structure type, refer to those of the standard type
inverter of the same capacity.
FR-S520-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K(-NA)
FR-S520S-0.1K
FR-S520S-0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K(-EC)
FR-S510W-0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K(-NA)
5 (0.20)

φ5 hole

- +
118 (4.65)
128 (5.04)

Rating plate
5 (0.20)

5 (0.20) 18.5 4 (0.16)


6 (0.24) 56 (2.20) 6 (0.24) (0.73) D2 D1
68 (2.68) D

3-phase 200V power supply


Capacity D D1 D2
0.1K, 0.2K 80.5 (3.17) 10 (0.39) 52 (2.05)
0.4K 112.5 (4.43) 42 (1.65) 52 (2.05)
0.75K 132.5 (5.22) 62 (2.44) 52 (2.05)

Single-phase 200V power supply


Capacity D D1 D2
0.1K, 0.2K 80.5 (3.17) 10 (0.39) 52 (2.05)
0.4K 142.5 (5.61) 42 (1.65) 82 (3.23)
0.75K 162.5 (6.40) 62 (2.44) 82 (3.23)

Single-phase 100V power supply


Capacity D D1 D2
0.1K 80.5 (3.17) 10 (0.39) 52 (2.05)
0.2K 110.5 (4.35) 10 (0.39) 82 (3.23)
0.4K 142.5 (5.61) 42 (1.65) 82 (3.23)
(Unit: mm (inches))

167

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


FR-S520-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K(-NA)
FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K(-NA)(-EC)
FR-S520S-1.5K(-EC)

5 (0.20)
FR-S510W-0.75K(-NA)
φ5 hole

- +

118 (4.65)
128 (5.04)
Rating plate
5 (0.20)

Cooling fan×1
5 (0.20) 18.5 D3
6 (0.24) W1 6 (0.24) (0.73) D2 D1
W D
3-phase 200V power supply
Capacity W W1 D D1 D2 D3
1.5K, 2.2K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 135.5 (5.33) 65 (2.56) 52 (2.05) 8 (0.31)
3.7K 170 (6.69) 158 (6.22) 142.5 (5.61) 72 (2.83) 52 (2.05) 5 (0.20)
3-phase 400V power supply
Capacity W W1 D D1 D2 D3
0.4K, 0.75K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 129.5 (5.10) 59 (2.32) 52 (2.05) 5 (0.20)
1.5K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 135.5 (5.33) 65 (2.56) 52 (2.05) 8 (0.31)
2.2K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 155.5 (6.12) 65 (2.56) 72 (2.83) 8 (0.31)
3.7K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 165.5 (6.52) 65 (2.56) 82 (3.23) 8 (0.31)

Single-phase 200V power supply


Capacity W W1 D D1 D2 D3
1.5K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 155.5 (6.12) 65 (2.56) 72 (2.83) 8 (0.31)
Single-phase 100V power supply
Capacity W W1 D D1 D2 D3
0.75K 108 (4.25) 96 (3.78) 149.5 (5.89) 59 (2.32) 72 (2.83) 5 (0.20)
* The FR-S540-0.4K, 0.75K (-NA) (-EC) and FR-S510W-0.75K (-NA) do not
have a cooling fan.
(Unit: mm (inches))

168

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cut dimension drawing>
16.5
24 (0.65)

18.5 (0.73)
(0.97) 23.75 (0.93)
15 10.5 13 11.75
(0.51)

1.5 (0.06)
72 (2.83) (0.59) (0.41) 48 (1.89) (0.46)
5- 4 hole

21.5 (0.85)

20 (0.79)

17 (0.67)

1.5
(0.06)
14.5 (0.57)

13 (0.51)
81.5 (3.21)
125 (4.92)

80 (3.15)
1.25
(0.05)
5-M3 hole
Effective depth 4.5

40 (1.57) 40 (1.57)

(Unit:mm (inches))
Choose the mounting screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of
the mounting threads.

169

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


5.
INSTRUCTIONS
5.1 Selecting Instructions........................................... 171
5.2 Peripheral Selecting Instructions.......................... 171
5.3 Operating Instructions.......................................... 173
5.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor ......................... 175

170

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


5.1 Selecting Instructions
(1) Inverter capacity selection
When a special motor is run or multiple motors are run in parallel by one inverter,
choose the inverter capacity so that the sum of the rated motor currents (at 50Hz)
will be not more than the rated output current of the inverter.
(2) Motor starting torque
The starting and acceleration characteristics of an inverter-driven motor are
restricted by the overload capacity of the inverter used. The torque characteristic
is generally smaller than at a start made by the commercial power supply. When
large starting torque is necessary, choose automatic torque boost control (set the
motor capacity in Pr. 98) or adjust the torque boost value. If these selection and
adjustment cannot develop enough torque, choose a one rank higher inverter
capacity or increase both the motor and inverter capacities.
(3) Acceleration/deceleration time
The acceleration/deceleration time of the motor is determined by the motor-
generated torque, load torque and load's inertia moment (J).
If the current limit or stall prevention function is activated during
acceleration/deceleration, the time may increase, so change the
acceleration/deceleration time setting to a little longer value.
When you want to shorten the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the
torque boost value (if you set a too large value, the stall prevention function will
be activated at a start, resulting in increased acceleration/deceleration time),
use automatic torque boost control, or increase the inverter and motor
capacities.

5.2 Peripheral Selecting Instructions


(1) Installation and selection of no-fuse breaker
To protect the inverter's primary side wiring, install a no-fuse breaker (NFB) on the
power receiving side. For selection of the NFB, refer to page 13 as it depends on
the power supply side power factor (which changes with the power supply voltage,
output frequency and load) of the inverter. Especially, a little larger capacity must
be chosen for a completely electromagnetic type NFB because its operation
characteristic changes with harmonic currents. Also, use the earth leakage circuit
breaker of our harmonic/surge suppression product. (Refer to page 15)

171

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(2) Handling of primary side magnetic contactor
When the external terminal is used (terminal STF or STR is used) for operation,
provide a primary side MC to prevent accidents due to an automatic restart at
power restoration after a power failure, such as an instantaneous power failure,
and to ensure safety in maintenance work. Do not use this MC to make frequent
starts and stops. (The switching life of the inverter input circuit is about 100,000
times.)
For parameter unit operation, an automatic restart after power failure is not
made and the MC cannot be used to make a start. Note that the primary side
MC may be used to make a stop but the motor will coast to a stop.

(3) Handling of secondary side magnetic contactor


In principle, do not provide a magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor
and switch it from off to on during operation. If it is switched on during inverter
operation, a large inrush current may flow, stopping the inverter due to overcurrent
shut-off. When an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply,
for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and motor have stopped.

(4) Installation of thermal relay


To protect the motor from overheat, the inverter has the protective functions using
electronic overcurrent protection. However, when multiple motors are run by a
single inverter or a multi-pole motor is run (for example), provide a thermal relay
(OCR) between the inverter and motor. In this case, set the electronic overcurrent
protection of the inverter to 0A, and set the thermal relay by adding a line-to-line
leakage current (refer to page 16) to 1.0 times the current value at 50Hz given on
the motor rating plate or 1.1 times the current value at 60Hz

(5) Disuse of power factor improving capacitor (power capacitor)


The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output
side may be overheated or damaged by the harmonic contents of the inverter
output. In addition, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor since
excessive currents will flow in the inverter to active overcurrent protection. To
improve the power factor, use a power factor improving reactor.

(6) Secondary side measuring instruments


If inverter-to-motor wiring is long, the measuring instruments and CT may
generate heat under the influence of line-to-line leakage currents. To prevent this,
choose the instruments which have allowances for current ratings.
(7) About electromagnetic wave interference
The inputs/outputs of the inverter's main circuit include harmonic content and may
interfere with communications apparatus (AM radios) and sensors used near the
inverter. In this case, installing the FR-BIF radio noise filter (for use on input side
only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter reduces interference.

172

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(8) Cable thickness and wiring distance
If the inverter-to-motor wiring distance is long, the motor torque will decrease
due to a voltage drop in the main circuit cables especially at low frequency
output. Use thick cables for wiring to make a voltage drop less than 2%. (A
selection example for the wiring distance of 20m (65.62feet) is given on page
11.)
For remote operation using analog signals, the control cable between operator
box or operator signal and inverter should be less than 30m (98.43feet) and
wire the cable away from the power circuit to avoid induction from other
equipment.
When using the external potentiometer to set the frequency, use a shielded or
twisted cable, and do not earth the shield, but connect it to terminal 5 as shown
below.
(3) Shielded cable
(3) 10 10
(2) (2)
2 2
(1) (1)
5
Frequency Twisted 5 Frequency
setting setting
cable
potentiometer potentiometer
Grounding
When the inverter is run in the low acoustic noise mode, high-speed switching will
generate more leakage currents than in the non-low acoustic noise mode. Always
ground the inverter and motor. In addition, always use the ground terminal of the
inverter to ground the inverter.

5.3 Operating Instructions


(1) Operation
When a magnetic contactor (MC) is provided on the primary side, do not use
this MC to make frequent starts/stops. Doing so can cause the inverter to fail.
When an alarm occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated to stop
the output. However, at this time, the motor cannot be brought to a sudden
stop. Hence, provide a mechanical stopping/holding mechanism for the
machine/equipment which requires an emergency stop.
Since the capacitor needs time to discharge, do not start inspection
immediately after powering off the inverter. More than 10 minutes after power-
off, make sure that there are no residual voltages with a multimeter etc. before
stating inspection.
(2) Wiring
Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will
damage the inverter circuit. Hence, before power-on, fully check the wiring and
sequence for incorrect wiring and so on.
Terminals P<+> and P1 are designed to connect a dedicated option. Do not
connect any equipment other than the dedicated option. In addition, do not
short the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and common terminal 5,
and terminals PC-SD.

173

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


(3) Installation
Avoid hostile environment where oil mist, fluff, dust etc. are floating, and install
the inverter in a clean place or put it within an enclosed box where floating
bodies will not enter. When placing the inverter inside a box, determine the
cooling system and box dimensions so that the ambient temperature of the
inverter will fall within the permissible temperature range (refer to page 166 for
the specified value).
The inverter may become hot locally, so do not mount it to combustible material
such as wood.
Mount the inverter to a wall in a vertical direction.
(4) Setting
By setting the operation panel, the inverter can be run at the speed as high as
120Hz. Therefore, wrong setting will lead to hazardous conditions. Using the
maximum frequency setting function, set the upper limit.
(The maximum frequency in the external operation mode is factory-set to
60Hz.)
Setting the DC injection brake operation voltage and operation time to values
higher than the factory settings can cause the motor to overheat (electronic
overcurrent protection trip).
(5) Power supply
When the inverter is installed near a large-capacity power transformer (500kVA
or more at the wiring length of 10m (32.81feet) or less) or the power capacitor is
to be switched, an excessive peak current will flow in the power supply input
circuit, damaging the inverter. In such a case, always install the FR-BEL or FR-
BAL power factor improving reactor.
1500 Power factor
Power supply
1000 improving reactor
equipment
installation range
capacity (kVA) 500
0
10 (32.81)
Wiring length (m (feet))
If a surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge energy may
flow into the inverter, causing the inverter to display OV1, OV2 or OV3 and
come to an alarm stop. In such a case, also install the FR-BEL or FR-BAL
power factor improving reactor.

174

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


5.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated
at the motor terminals. Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may
deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following measures:

# Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-rectified motor. Specifically
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven, insulation-rectified motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration
motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".

(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side


On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage
suppression filter (FR-ASF-H).

175

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 PARAMETER DATA CODE LIST ..... 177

176

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


APPENDIX 1 PARAMETER DATA CODE LIST
Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
0 Torque boost 00 80 0.1% 0
1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0.01Hz 0
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0.01Hz 0
3 Base frequency 03 83 0.01Hz 0
Multi-speed setting
4 04 84 0.01Hz 0
(high speed)
Basic functions

Multi-speed setting
5 05 85 0.01Hz 0
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
6 06 86 0.01Hz 0
(low speed)
7 Acceleration time 07 87 0.1s 0
8 Deceleration time 08 88 0.1s 0
Electronic thermal O/L
9 09 89 0.01A 0
relay
Extended function display
30 1E 9E 1 0
selection
79 Operation mode selection 4F None 1 0

The extended function parameters are made valid by setting "1" in Pr. 30 "extended
function display selection".
Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
DC injection brake
10 0A 8A 0.01Hz 0
operation frequency
DC injection brake
11 0B 8B 0.1s 0
operation time
DC injection brake
12 0C 8C 0.1% 0
Standard operation functions

voltage
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0.01Hz 0
14 Load pattern selection 0E 8E 1 0
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0.01Hz 0
Jog acceleration/
16 10 90 0.1s 0
deceleration time
RUN key rotation
17 11 91 1 0
direction selection
19 Base frequency voltage 13 93 0.1V 0
Acceleration/deceleration
20 14 94 0.01Hz 0
reference frequency
Stall prevention function
21 15 95 1 0
selection
Stall prevention operation
22 16 96 0.1% 0
level

177

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
Stall prevention operation
23 level compensation factor 17 97 0.1% 0
at double speed
Multi-speed setting
24 18 98 0.01Hz 0
(speed 4)
Multi-speed setting
25 19 99 0.01Hz 0
(speed 5)
Multi-speed setting
26 1A 9A 0.01Hz 0
(speed 6)
Multi-speed setting
Standard operation functions

27 1B 9B 0.01Hz 0
(speed 7)
Stall prevention operation
28 reduction starting 1C 9C 0.01Hz 0
frequency
Acceleration/deceleration
29 1D 9D 1 0
pattern
31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0.01Hz 0
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0.01Hz 0
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0.01Hz 0
34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0.01Hz 0
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0.01Hz 0
36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0.01Hz 0
37 Speed display 25 A5 0.001 0
Frequency setting
38 26 A6 0.01Hz 0
voltage gain frequency
Frequency setting current
39 27 A7 0.01Hz 0
gain frequency
Start-time ground fault
40 28 A8 1 0
detection selection
Up-to-frequency
41 29 A9 0.1% 0
sensitivity
functions
terminal

Output frequency
Output

42 2A AA 0.01Hz 0
detection
Output frequency
43 detection for reverse 2B AB 0.01Hz 0
rotation
Second acceleration/
44 2C AC 0.1s 0
deceleration time
functions
Second

45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0.1s 0


46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0.1% 0
Second V/F
47 2F AF 0.01Hz 0
(base frequency)

178

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
Output current detection
48 30 B0 0.1% 0
Current detection

level
Output current detection
49 31 B1 0.1s 0
signal delay time
Zero current detection
50 32 B2 0.1% 0
level
Zero current detection
51 33 B3 0.01s 0
time
Control panel display
52 34 B4 1 0
data selection
Display functions

Frequency setting
53 35 B5 1 0
operation selection
FM (AM) terminal
54 36 B6 1 0
function selection
Frequency monitoring
55 37 B7 0.01Hz 0
reference
Current monitoring
56 38 B8 0.01A 0
reference
Automatic

functions

57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0.1s 0


restart

58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0.1s 0


Additional

Remote setting function


function

selection/Frequency
59 3B BB 1 0
setting storage function
selection
RL terminal function
60 3C BC 1 0
selection
RM terminal function
61 3D BD 1 0
selection
RH terminal function
functions
selection
Terminal

62 3E BE 1 0
selection
STR terminal function
63 3F BF 1 0
selection
RUN terminal function
64 40 C0 1 0
selection
A, B, C terminal function
65 41 C1 1 0
selection
Operation selection

66 Retry selection 42 C2 1 0
Number of retries at
67 43 C3 1 0
functions

alarm occurrence
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0.1s 0
69 Retry count display erase 45 C5 1 0
70 Soft-PWM setting 46 C6 1 0
71 Applied motor 47 C7 1 0

179

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 1 0
Operation selection functions

73 0-5V/0-10V selection 49 C9 1 0
74 Input filter time constant 4A CA 1 0
Reset selection/PU stop
75 4B CB 1 0
selection
Cooling fan operation
76 4C CC 1 0
selection
Parameter write disable
77 4D None 1 0
selection
Reverse rotation
78 4E CE 1 0
prevention selection
Multi-speed setting
80 50 D0 0.01Hz 0
(speed 8)
Multi-speed setting
81 51 D1 0.01Hz 0
(speed 9)
Multi-speed operation

Multi-speed setting
82 52 D2 0.01Hz 0
(speed 10)
Multi-speed setting
83 53 D3 0.01Hz 0
(speed 11)
Multi-speed setting
84 54 D4 0.01Hz 0
(speed 12)
Multi-speed setting
85 55 D5 0.01Hz 0
(speed 13)
Multi-speed setting
86 56 D6 0.01Hz 0
(speed 14)
Multi-speed setting
87 57 D7 0.01Hz 0
(speed 15)
88 PID action selection 58 D8 1 0
89 PID proportional band 59 D9 0.1% 0
PID control

90 PID integral time 5A DA 0.1s 0


91 PID upper limit 5B DB 0.1% 0
92 PID lower limit 5C DC 0.1% 0
PID action set point for
93 5D DD 0.01% 0
PU operation
94 PID differential time 5E DE 0.01s 0
95 Rated motor slip 5F DF 0.01% 0
Slip compensation time
96 60 E0 0.01s 0
constant
Sub functions

Constant-output region
97 slip compensation 61 E1 1 0
selection
Automatic torque boost
98 selection 62 E2 0.01kW 0
(Motor capacity)
99 Motor primary resistance 63 E3 0.001Ω 0

180

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


Data Code Link Parameter
Computer
Extension
Func- Parameter Link Data
Name Setting
tion Number Read Write Setting
(Data Code
Increments *
7F/FF)
C1 (900 FM (AM) terminal
5C DC  1
(901)) calibration
Frequency setting 1
C2 (902) 5E DE 0.01Hz
voltage bias frequency (6C/EC=0)
Calibration parameters

Frequency setting 1
C3 (902) 5E DE 0.1%
voltage bias (6C/EC=1)
Frequency setting 1
C4 (903) 5F DF 0.1%
voltage gain (6C/EC=1)
Frequency setting current 1
C5 (904) 60 E0 0.01Hz
bias frequency (6C/EC=0)
Frequency setting current 1
C6 (904) 60 E0 0.1%
bias (6C/EC=1)
Frequency setting current 1
C7 (905) 61 E1 0.1%
gain (6C/EC=1)
C8 (269) Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.
parameters

CLr Parameter clear  FC 1 


Clear

ECL Alarm history clear  F4 1 

Communication station
n1 (331) 1F 9F 1 3
number
n2 (332) Communication speed 20 A0 1 3
n3 (333) Stop bit length 21 A1 1 3
Parity check
n4 (334) 22 A2 1 3
presence/absence
Number of
Communication parameters

n5 (335) 23 A3 1 3
communication retries
Communication check
n6 (336) 24 A4 0.1s 3
time interval
n7 (337) Wait time setting 25 A5 1 3
n8 (338) Operation command write 26 A6 1 3
n9 (339) Speed command write 27 A7 1 3
n10 (340) Link start mode selection 28 A8 1 3
n11 (341) CR/LF selection 29 A9 1 3
n12 (342) E2PROM write selection 2A AA 1 3
n13 (145) PU display language 2D AD 1 1
n14 (990) PU buzzer sound control 5A DA 1 9
n15 (991) PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 1 9
PU main display screen
n16 (992) 5C DC 1 9
data selection
PU disconnection
n17 (993) 5D DD 1 9
detection/PU setting lock
The parameter numbers within parentheses are those for use of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04).
* Though parameter setting by RS-485 communication can be made in the setting
increments indicated in the table, note that the valid setting increments are as
indicated in the parameter list (page 46).

181

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
Mar, 2000 IB(NA)-0600027-A First edition
Jun., 2000 IB(NA)-0600027-B Addition
Single-phase 100V power input specifications
Mar., 2001 IB(NA)-0600027-C Addition
3-phase 400V power input specifications

You might also like